TOSHIBA Bar Code Printer

B-SA4T Series
External Equipment Interface Specification

First Edition: February 21, 2005

Second Edition:
Third Edition: July 27, 2005
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page
1. SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................... 1

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 1

3. INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE............................................................................................................. 2
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 7
3.3 USB INTERFACE .................................................................................................................. 16
3.4 NETWORK INTERFACE....................................................................................................... 16

4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 17

4.1 SYSTEM MODE FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................. 17
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................... 21
4.3 DOWNLOAD MODE SETTING FUNCTION ......................................................................... 21

5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE ................................................................................................... 22

5.1 INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................... 22
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION ................................................................................................. 24

6. INTERFACE COMMANDS......................................................................................................... 26
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS................................................................................................... 26
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS........................................................................................................... 27
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION .................................................................... 29
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND ......................................................................................... 29
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND ............................................................................ 33
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND.................................................................. 38
6.3.4 RIBBON MOTOR DRIVE VOLTAGE FINE ADJUST COMMAND................................... 39
6.3.5 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND ............................................................................. 40
6.3.6 CLEAR AREA COMMAND............................................................................................... 41
6.3.7 LINE FORMAT COMMAND ............................................................................................. 43
6.3.8 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND ............................................................................ 49
6.3.9 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND........................................................................... 63
6.3.10 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND .................................................................................. 79
6.3.11 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND.................................................................................. 119
6.3.12 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND ................................................................................ 123
6.3.13 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND ........................................................................................ 126
6.3.14 ISSUE COMMAND........................................................................................................... 139
6.3.15 FEED COMMAND ............................................................................................................ 152
6.3.16 EJECT COMMAND .......................................................................................................... 158
6.3.17 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND...................................................................... 159
6.3.18 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND ..................................................................... 161
6.3.19 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND ........................................................................ 163
6.3.20 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND .................................... 164

i
 Page
6.3.21 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND ([ESC] XD) ......................................... 165
6.3.22 GRAPHIC COMMAND ..................................................................................................... 174
6.3.23 SAVE START COMMAND ([ESC] XO) ............................................................................ 183
6.3.24 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND ...................................................................................... 184
6.3.25 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND ([ESC] XQ) ................................................................. 185
6.3.26 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND .................................................................. 186
6.3.27 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND ................................................................................... 187
6.3.28 RESET COMMAND.......................................................................................................... 189
6.3.29 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND..................................................................................... 190
6.3.30 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE REQUEST COMMAND............................................ 191
6.3.31 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ......................................................... 192
6.3.32 PRINTER OPTION STATUS ACQUIRE COMMAND ...................................................... 193
6.3.33 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND........................................................................................ 194
6.3.34 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND ................................................... 195
6.3.35 DHCP FUNCTION SET COMMAND................................................................................ 196
6.3.36 PASS-THROUGH COMMAND ........................................................................................ 197
6.3.37 INTERNAL SERIAL INTERFACE PARAMETER SET COMMAND................................. 198
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR.................................................................. 199
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND ....................................................................................... 199
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND ............................................................... 203
6.4.3 RFID PARAMETER SET COMMAND.............................................................................. 205
6.4.4 BATCH RESET COMMAND ............................................................................................ 206
6.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO THE RFID................................................................................ 207
6.5.1 RFID TAG POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMMAND ......................................................... 207
6.5.2 RFID TAG READ COMMAND.......................................................................................... 208
6.5.3 RFID VOID PATTERN PRINT COMMAND ..................................................................... 210

7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION................................................................................................. 211

8. ERROR PROCESSING.............................................................................................................. 212

8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS ............................................................................................... 212
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING ................................................................................... 212
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES.................... 215
8.4 SYSTEM ERRORS................................................................................................................ 215
8.5 RESET PROCESSING.......................................................................................................... 215
8.6 RFID ERROR ........................................................................................................................ 216

9. STATUS RESPONSE ................................................................................................................ 217

9.1 FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................... 217
9.1.1 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 218
9.1.2 DETAIL STATUS.............................................................................................................. 219
9.1.3 SUMMARY OF STATUS FORMAT.................................................................................. 221
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE SINGALS ...................................................................................... 222
9.2.1 COMPATIBILITY MODE .................................................................................................. 222
9.3 E-MAIL ................................................................................................................................... 223

ii
 Page
10. LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS ............................................................................. 224

11. LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES (UPPER LINE OF LCD) ............................. 227

12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE .................................................................................................... 229

12.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER,
GOTHIC725 BLACK....... 229
12.2 PRESENTATION................................................................................................................... 236
12.3 OCR-A ................................................................................................................................... 240
12.4 OCR-B ................................................................................................................................... 247
12.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 ......................................................................................................... 253
12.6 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3 .............................................................................................................. 260
12.7 TEC OUTLINE FONT 2, 3, GOTHIC725 BLACK .................................................................. 261
12.8 TrueType FONT..................................................................................................................... 268

13. BAR CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................... 275

14. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA............................................................................................. 289

15. AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES................................................................ 310

iii
1. SCOPE
This specification applies to the external equipment interface for use with the B-SA4T series general-
purpose bar code printer.

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The external equipment interface connects the printer to the host computer through a serial interface
(RS-232C/USB), parallel interface (Centronics), or a network for making various settings and printing
labels.
This specification describes how to use the external equipment interface for the TPCL (TEC Printer
Command Language).

The following table shows the system configuration.

Print head type 203 dpi 300 dpi

Flash ROM 16 MB × 1 = 16 MB
Whole 8 MB × 1 = 8 MB
Memory
SDRAM Image buffer of 0.8 MB (Label 1.8 MB (Label
whole SDRAM length: 999 mm) length: 999 mm)
Bit map Kanji (Gothic) Standard
Bit map Kanji (
RS-232C Option
Centronics Standard
USB Standard
100BASE LAN board Option
Cutter module Option
Strip module Option
Wireless LAN module Option
RFID module Option

-1-
3. INTERFACE
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
(1) Type: Conforming to RS-232C
(2) Communication Mode: Full duplex
(3) Transmission Speed: 2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
115200 bps
(4) Synchronization Method: Start-stop synchronization
(5) Start Bit: 1 bit
(6) Stop Bit: 1 bit
2 bits
(7) Data Length: 7 bits
8 bits
(8) Parity: None
Even
Odd
(9) Error Detection: Parity error Vertical parity error check
Framing error This error occurs if no stop bit is found in the frame
specified starting with the start bit.
(10) Protocol: No-procedure method
(11) Data Input Code: ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(12) Receive Buffer: 1 MB
* The use of the receive buffer is shared between interfaces.

-2-
(13) Flow Control: XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
READY/BUSY (RTS) Protocol

XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol

When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and sends an XON code (11H). (Transmission or non-transmission of the XON code is
selectable by means of the parameter setting.)

The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the free space of the receive buffer becomes
10K bytes or less.

The printer sends an XON code (11H) when the free space of the receive buffer becomes
512K bytes or more.

After the receive buffer has become full, the printer discards data received, without storing
it in the buffer. (After detecting the XOFF code, the host computer must stop
transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full.)

The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off. (Transmission or non-
transmission of the XOFF code is selectable by means of the parameter setting.)

The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).

The RTS signal is always “High”.

 READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol

When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY).

The printer turns the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) when the free space of the receive
buffer becomes 10K bytes or less.

The printer turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) when the free space of the
receive buffer become s 512K bytes or more.

After the receive buffer has become full, the printer discards data received, without storing
it in the buffer. (After detecting the BUSY signal, the host computer must stop
transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full.)

The RTS signal is always “High”.

-3-
 XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol

When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY). The printer also sends an XON code
(11H).

When the free space of the receive buffer become s 10K bytes or less, the printer turns the
DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) and sends an XOFF code (13H).

When the free space of the receive buffer becomes 512K bytes or more, the printer turns
the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) and sends an XON code (11H).

After the receive buffer has become full, the printer discards data received, without storing
it in the buffer. (After detecting the XOFF code or BUSY signal, the host computer must
stop transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full.)

The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off.

The RTS signal is always “High”.

 READY/BUSY (RTS) Protocol

When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer turns the RTS signal to “High”
(READY).

The printer turns the RTS signal to “Low” (BUSY) when the free space of the receive
buffer becomes 10K bytes or less.

The printer turns the RTS signal to “High” (READY) when the free space of the receive
buffer becomes 512K bytes or more.

After the receive buffer has become full, the printer discards data received, without storing
it in the buffer. (After detecting the BUSY signal, the host computer must stop
transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full.)

The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).

The DSR signal from the host must always be “High”.

* When the flow control is performed with a Windows PC, “READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol”
should be selected, and “Hardware” should be selected for the flow control in the Windows
communication port setting.
NOTE: For “READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol”, data should be sent after 200 ms from when the
DTR signal is turned to “High” (READY). For “READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol”, data
should be sent after 200 ms from when the RTS signal is turned to “High” (READY).

-4-
(14) Input/Output Signals

FG
TD
RD
RTS
Printer CTS Host
DSR
SG
DTR

(15) Connector Pin Assignment and Signal Description

Signal
Pin No. Function Signal Direction
Name
1 FG • Ground line for circuit protection
2 RD • Line for data which the printer receives from the host. ← Host
• Logic 1 is a Low level, while logic 0 is a High level.
• It is in the Low (Mark) state when no transmission is in
progress.
3 TD • Line for data which the printer sends to the host. Printer →
• Logic 1 is a Low level, while logic 0 is a High level.
• It is in the Low (Mark) state when no transmission is in
progress.
4 CTS • It is an input signal indicating whether or not the data ← Host
transmission to the host is possible. However, this
printer does not detect this signal.
5 RTS • Output signal to the host. Printer →
For the READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol:
• It indicates the ready state for the received data.
• It is at “Low” when the receive buffer is nearly full, and at
“High” when nearly empty.
For protocol other than the READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol:
• After the power is turned on, it is always at “High” level.
6 DTR • Output signal to the host. Printer →
For the READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol or XON/XOFF
(DC1/DC3) protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
• It indicates the ready state for the received data.
• It is at “Low” level when the receive buffer is near full,
and at “High” level when near empty.
For the XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) protocol or READY/BUSY
(RTS) protocol:
• After the power is turned on, it is always at “High”.
7 SG • Ground line for all data and control signals.
20 DSR • Input signal from the host. ← Host
• For the printer to receive data, it must be at “High” level.

-5-
(16) Interface Circuit
 Input Circuit

SN75189 or equivalent
RD
CTS
DSR

 Output Circuit
SN75188 or equivalent

TD
RTS
DTR

 Signal Levels
Input Voltage H...... +3 ~ +15 V
L ...... -3 ~ -15 V
Output Voltage H...... +6 ~ +13 V
L ...... -6 ~ -13 V

-6-
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
(1) Type: Centronics
(2) Mode: Conforms to IEEE1284 Compatibility mode and Nibble mode
(3) Data Input Method: Parallel 8 bits (DATA1 ~ 8)
(4) Control Signals: Compatibility mode Nibble mode
nStrobe HostClk
nAck PrtClk
Busy PtrBusy
PError AckDataReq
Select Xflag
nAutoFd HostBusy
nInit nInit
nFault nDataAvail
nSelectIn IEEE1284Active
(5) Data Input Code: ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(6) Receive Buffer: 1 MB
* The use of the receive buffer is shared between interfaces.

-7-
(7) Input/Output Circuit Configuration and Input/Output Conditions:

Signal Configuration

+5V
DATA1 ~ 8 1K SN74LS245 or equivalent

Logic level
Input (Input)
+5V “1” = 2 ~ 5 V
nStrobe/HostClk/HostClk 1K SN74LS14 or equivalent “0” = 0 ~ 0.4 V
nInit/nInit/
nReverseRequest
nAutoFd/HostBusy/ 100P
HostAck
nSelectIn/IEEE1284Active/
IEEE1284Active

+5V
Busy/PtrBusy/PeriphAck
SN7406 or equivalent 1K
nFault/nDataAvail/
Outpu nPeriphRequest
t nAck/PtrClk/PeriphClk Logic level
100P
Select/Xflag/XFlag (Input)
PError/AckDataReq/ “1” = 2.4 ~ 5 V
nAckReverse “0” = 0 ~ 0.4 V

(8) Connector: Printer

Amp. Japan 552742-1 or equivalent
DDK 57RE-40360-73B or equivalent
Cable
Amp. Japan 552470-1 or equivalent
DDK 57E-30360 or equivalent

-8-
(9) Connector Pin Diagram (IEEE1284-B Connector):

Pin Signal Name

No. Compatibility Mode Nibble mode
1 nStrobe HostClk
2 Data 1 Data 1
3 Data 2 Data 2
4 Data 3 Data 3
5 Data 4 Data 4
6 Data 5 Data 5
7 Data 6 Data 6
8 Data 7 Data 7
9 Data 8 Data 8
10 nAck PtrClk
11 Busy PtrBusy
12 PError AckDataReq
13 Select Xflag
14 nAutoFd HostBusy
15 NC NC
16 0V 0V
17 CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND
18 +5V (for detection) +5V (for detection)
19 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)
20 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
21 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
22 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
23 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
24 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
25 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
26 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
27 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
28 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10)
29 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11)
30 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31)
31 nInit nInit
32 nFault nDataAvail
33 0V 0V
34 NC NC
35 NC NC
36 nSelectIn IEEE1284Active

19 36

1 18

-9-
(10) Input/Output Signals :
Compatibility mode

Data 1 ~ 8 (Printer ← Host)

Input data signals for the 1st to 8th bits.

Logic 1 is “High” level.

Min. data pulse width of 2.5 µsec.
 nStrobe (Printer ← Host)

Synchronizing signal for reading the above data.

Normally at “High” level. The data is read at the rise of the Low level pulse.

Minimum data pulse width of 0.5 µsec.
 Busy (Printer → Host)

This signal indicates that the printer is in a Busy state.

When initialized after the power is turned on, the printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the signal to “Low” level.

The signal turns to “High” level (in a Busy state) when data is set from the host (at the fall
of the nStrobe signal).

The signal turns to “Low” level when the printer reads the data.

When the free space of the receive buffer becomes 512 bytes or less, the printer keeps
the signal at “High” level (in a Busy state) for 10 seconds when data is set from the host, to
extend the data read interval.

When the receive buffer has become full, the printer stops reading data. When data is
set from the host, then, it keeps the signal at “High” level (in a Busy state) until the receive
buffer has a free space.

The signal is kept at “High” level (in a Busy state) until one of the following states is
cleared.
• PAUSE state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon receipt of the nInit signal
 nAck (Printer → Host)

This signal indicates that the printer has read the data set by the host and is ready to
receive the next data.

The signal is normally at “High”. It is at “Low” for about 5 µsec. after the fall of the BUSY
signal. The host should usually set data after the ACK signal is turned from “Low” to
“High”.

If the nAck signal is ignored and the next data is set while the nAck signal is Low, the
“LOW” level continues about further 5 µsec at the fall of the BUSY signal. However, the
data can be received properly.

- 10 -
 nInit (Printer ← Host)

Reset request signal from the host.

Normally at “High” level. An input of this signal at “Low” level causes the printer to be
initialized in the same manner as when the power is turned on.
* When “Reset process when the nInit signal is ON” is set to “OFF” in the parameter
setting in the system mode, the printer is not initialized even if it receives this signal at
low level.

When the nInit signal is input during printing, the printer completes printing one tag/label
which is being printed, cancels the next processing, then is initialized in the same manner
as when the power is turned on.
* When “Reset process when the nInit signal is ON” is set to “OFF” in the parameter
setting in the system mode, the next process proceeds without being canceled.

Minimum pulse width of 0.5 µsec.
 Select (Printer → Host)

This is an output signal which indicates whether the printer is in Pause state or placed
online. The printer can receive data while placed online.

The signal is at “Low” level while the printer is in a Pause state.

The signal is kept at “Low” level (in a Pause state) until one of the following states is
cleared.
• Pause state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon power on or receipt of the nInit signal
 nFault (Printer → Host)

Output signal indicating that the printer is in a Fault state.

At “Low” level while the printer is in a Fault state.

The signal is kept at “Low” level (in a Fault state) until one of the following states is
cleared.
• Pause state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon power on or receipt of the nInit signal
PError (Printer → Host)

Output signal indicating a label end or ribbon end state.

At “High” level when the printer is in a label end or ribbon end state.

Turns to “Low” level when the label end or ribbon end state is cleared.
+5 V

This is not a signal but a +5 V power supply voltage.

The maximum current of 500 mA can be taken out.
nSelectIn (Printer ← Host)

Not used
11 nAutoFd (Printer ← Host)

Not used

- 11 -
Nibble mode

PtrClk (Printer → Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: It is used for evaluating data sent to the host.

Reverse idle phase: When the printer changes the signal from Low to High, an
interrupt informing the host that the data is available, occurs
 PtrBusy (Printer → Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 3 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 7 is used
for the second transfer. Indicates the forward channel is in
a Busy state.
 AckDataReq (Printer → Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 2 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 6 is used
for the second transfer.

Reverse idle phase: This signal is set to high until the data transfer is requested
by the host. Then, the process is performed according to
the nDataAvail signal.
 Xflag (Printer ← Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 1 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 5 is used
for the second transfer.

 HostBusy (Printer ← Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: It indicates that the host can receive data from the printer by
setting the signal to low. Then, the host sets the signal to
high, and sends the Ack indicating that the nibble data is
received. When the signal is set to low after one reverse
channel data transfer is performed, the interface phase
changes to the idle phase. At that time, there is no
available data on the printer.

Reverse idle phase: When this signal is set to high according to the low pulse of
the PtrClk signal, the host enters the reverse data transfer
phase again. If this signal is set to high when the
IEEE1284 Active signal is low, the IEEE1284 idle phase
stops, and the interface enters the Compatibility mode.
 nDataAvail (Printer → Host)

Reverse data transfer phase: When the signal is low, it indicates the printer has data to be
sent to the host. And it is used for sending data bits 0 and
4.

Reverse idle phase: It is used for indicating that the data is available.

- 12 -
(11) Timing Chart

When receiving normal data:
For the Compatibility mode, one of two types of timing for BUSY-ACK can be selected.
a) Timing 1 (Default)

When the USB board has not been installed :

Data 1 ~ 8
Min. 1 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Min. 1 µsec

nStrobe
Min. 0.5 µsec
(Host → Printer)

Busy
(Host ← Printer)

nAck
(Host ← Printer)
Approx. 1 µsec

b) Timing 2

Data 1 ~ 8
Min. 1 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Min. 1 µsec

nStrobe
Min. 0.5 µsec
(Host → Printer)

Busy
(Host ← Printer)

nAck
(Host ← Printer)
Approx. 5 µsec

- 13 -
  Receiving data in the Compatibility mode when the free space of the receive buffer is 512
bytes or less:

When the free space of the receive buffer become s 512 bytes or less, the printer stores all
data already received in the receive buffer, continues to be in a Busy state (Busy signal at
“High” level) for 10 seconds to extend the data read interval when data is set from the
host, then reads the data 10 seconds later.

If the free space becomes 513 bytes or more while waiting for reading data, the printer will
receive the data with the normal data receive timing.

When there is no free space in the receive buffer, the printer stops reading data. When
data is set from the host, then the printer continues to be in a Busy state (Busy signal at
“High” level) until the receive buffer has a free space.

Data 1 ~ 8
(Host → Printer)

nStrobe
(Host → Printer)

Busy
(Host ← Printer) 10 sec 10 sec

nAck
(Host ← Printer)
511 byte-space 0 byte-space
512 byte-space 1 byte-space
1 byte -space

(12) Relationship between Printer Setting and PC Setting and Their Operation Modes

Host setting Windows95/98/Me WindowsNT4.0 Windows2000/XP

Printer setting Compatibility ECP Compatibility ECP Compatibility ECP
Compatibility mode (SPP) SPP SPP SPP SPP SPP SPP
* SPP mode operations include support for the Nibble mode.
* The printer returns the following 13 byte-status to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately
after the [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] is received. The printer returns 23 bytes (described in (13)
Status with the receive buffer free space information on the next page) to the Nibble mode
negotiation immediately after the [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is received.
Status to be returned immediately after the [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] is received (13 bytes):

SOX STX Status Remaining count ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

- 14 -
(13) Status with the receive buffer free space information
The printer should return a status with the receive buffer free space information to the Nibble
mode negotiation immediately after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is received, as described below.
Status to be returned immediately after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is sent (23 bytes):

SOH 01H Indicates the header of the status block

STX 02H
Status 3XH Printer status
3XH * Details are described later.
Status type 33H Indicates that the status includes the receive buffer free space
information.
Remaining 3XH Remaining number of labels to be printed
count 3XH * Details are described later.
3XH
3XH
Length 3XH Total number of bytes of this status block.
3XH
Free space 3XH Free space of the receive buffer
of receive buffer 3XH “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
3XH However, the maximum value should be the receive buffer
3XH capacity.
3XH
Receive buffer 3XH Receive buffer capacity
capacity 3XH “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
3XH However, the maximum value differs depending on the
models.
3XH
3XH
CR 0DH Indicates the footer of the status block.
LF 0AH

- 15 -
3.3 USB INTERFACE
(1) Standard: Conforming to USB Standard Rev. 1.1
(2) Data Transfer Type: Control transfer, Bulk transfer
(3) Transfer Rate: Full speed (12 Mbps)
(4) Transfer Control Method: Status with the receive buffer free space information is sent in
response to a read request immediately after [ESC] [WB] [LF][NUL],
as described in Section 3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE, (13).

3.4 NETWORK INTERFACE

(1) Configuration

100BASE LAN
 Wireless LAN module
(2) Protocol: TCP/IP
(3) Network Specifications

LPR server function
 WEB printer function
 Socket communication function
 E-mail transmission/reception function
* For more details on the network, refer to the Network Specification (EAA-2167).

- 16 -
4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS
4.1 SYSTEM MODE FUNCTIONS
The system mode has the following functions for the printer self -test and setting various parameters.
For details, refer to Key Operation Specification (EAA-2166).
(1) Self-test
• Maintenance counter/various parameters printouts
• Automatic self-test
• Head broken dots check

(2) Various parameters settings

• Character code selection
• Selection of font 0
• RS-232C communication speed
• RS-232C data length
• RS-232C stop bit length
• RS-232C parity
• RS-232C transmission control
• Language for LCD messages
• Forward feed standby
• Control code
• Peel-off wait status selection
• [FEED] key function
• Kanji code selection
• Euro code setting
• Automatic head broken dots check
• Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
• Web printer function setting
• Reset process when the nInit signal is ON
• Ribbon near end detection setting
• Plug-and-play operation mode
• Label end/ribbon end process setting
• Pre-strip function setting
• Reverse feed speed setting
• MaxiCode specification setting

(3) Various parameters settings

• Feed amount fine adjustment
• Cut (strip) position fine adjustment
• Reverse feed amount fine adjustment
• X-coordinate fine adjustment
• Print density fine adjustment (Thermal transfer print mode)
• Print density fine adjustment (Direct thermal print mode)
• Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment (Take-up side)
• Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment (Feed side)
• Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment
• Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment

- 17 -
(4) Test print
• Print conditions setting
• 1-dot slant line printout
• 3-dot slant line printout
• Character printout
• Bar code printout
• Non-printing
• Line printout for the assembly process check
• Automatic printout for the assembly process check (Transmissive sensor)
• Automatic printout for the assembly process check (Reflective sensor)

(5) Sensor display/adjustment

• Thermal head temperature sensor display
• Ambient temperature sensor display
• Reflective sensor state display/adjustment
• Transmissive sensor state display/adjustment
• Reflective sensor adjustment value setting (without paper)
• Transmissive sensor adjustment value setting (without paper)

(6) RAM clear

• Maintenance counter clear
• Parameter clear

(7) IP address setting

• Printer IP address
• Gateway IP address
• Subnet mask
• Socket communication port
• DHCP setting
• DHCP client ID setting

(8) BASIC setting

• BASIC setting
• BASIC file browser
• BASIC trace setting
• Extend BASIC mode

(9) Assembly process check

• Option check

(10) RFID Setting

• RFID module type selection
• RFID error tag detection
• Max. number of RFID issue retries
• Max. number of RFID read retries
• RFID read retry time-out
• Max. number of RFID write retries
• RFID write retry time-out
• RFID adjustment for retry

- 18 -
(11) Initial values after RAM clear
• Initial values after maintenance counter clear
Parameter Initial Value
Label distance covered 0 km
Printed distance 0 km
Cut count 0
Ribbon motor drive time 0 hour
RS-232C hardware error count 0
System error count 0
Momentary power interruption count 0

• Initial values after parameter clear

Parameter Initial Value
Feed amount fine adjustment (PC) 0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment 0 mm
(PC)
Reverse feed amount fine adjustment (PC) 0 mm
Print density fine adjustment 0
(Thermal transfer print mode) (PC)
Print density fine adjustment 0
(Direct thermal print mode) (PC)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment 0
(Take-up side) (PC)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment 0
(Feed side) (PC)
Feed amount fine adjustment (Key) 0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment 0 mm
(Key)
Reverse feed amount fine adjustment (Key) 0 mm
Print density fine adjustment 0
(Thermal transfer print mode) (Key)
Print density fine adjustment 0
(Direct thermal print mode) (Key)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment 0
(Take-up side) (Key)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment 0
(Feed side) (Key)
X-coordinate fine adjustment (Key) 0 mm
Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine 1.4 V
adjustment value
Reflective sensor manual threshold fine 1.0 V
adjustment value
Type of character code PC-850
Font of 0 “0” (without slash mark)
Communication speed 9600 bps
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Parity NONE

- 19 -
 Parameter Initial Value
Flow control XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR)
protocol:
(XON output when the power is on,
XOFF output when the power is off)
Language for LCD messages English
Forward feed standby after an issue OFF
Type of control code Auto
Strip wait status selection OFF
[FEED] key function FEED (One label is fed.)
Kanji code TYPE1
Euro code B0H
Automatic head broken dots check OFF
Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting TYPE 1
Web printer function OFF
Reset process when the nInit signal is ON ON
Ribbon near end detection setting OFF
Expansion I/O operation mode TYPE1
Plug-and-play operation mode OFF
Label end/ribbon end process setting Printing is stopped when a label end
or ribbon end is detected.
Pre strip process setting OFF
Reverse feed speed 3”/sec
MaxiCode specification setting Compatible with existing version
Status response ON
Label pitch 76.2 mm
Effective print length 74.2 mm
Effective print width 203 dpi 104.0 mm
300 dpi 105.7 mm
Print method Thermal transfer
Type of sensor Transmissive sensor
Feed speed 4”/sec
Issue mode Batch
PC save automatic call ON
BASIC interpreter setting OFF
BASIC interpreter trace setting OFF
DHCP setting OFF
RFID module type selection None
RFID error tag detection None
Max. number of RFID issue retries 3
Max. number of RFID read retries 5
RFID read retry time-out 4.0 sec.
Max. number of RFID write retries 5
RFID write retry time-out 2.0 sec.
RFID adjustment for retry Invalid: 0 mm

• The total label distance covered, sensor adjustment values (system mode <5>), IP address
setting, socket communication number setting, and data of the flash memory are not cleared
by RAM clear.

- 20 -
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS
The online mode has the following functions for issuing labels and setting the threshold.
(For details, refer to Key Operation Specification (EAA-2166).)
(1) Issuing labels (by external equipment interface commands)
(2) Paper feed (by the [FEED] key)
(3) Pause (Halts issuing labels by the [PAUSE] key)
(4) Restart (Reissues labels by the [RESTART] key after halting issuing labels or after the occurrence
of an error.)
(5) Reset (Enters a usual initial state which is obtained after the power is turned on, using the
[RESTART] key.)
(6) Error indication
(7) Threshold setting
(8) Various parameters settings
(9) Various fine adjustments setting
(10) Dumping of receive buffer
(11) BASIC expansion mode
(12) Auto calibration setting
(13) LAN enable/disable setting

4.3 DOWNLOAD MODE SETTING FUNCTION

When the power is turned on while holding down the [FEED], [PAUSE], and [RESTART] keys at the
same time, the printer enters the download mode. Therefore, the usual operations cannot be
performed.
For details, refer to the Key Operation Specification (EAA-2166).

- 21 -
5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section describes the outline of the transmission sequence.

5.1 INITIAL SETTING

Writable characters, logos, and PC interface commands must be stored before the label issue
operation.
(1) Storing writable characters and logos

Power ON

No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory.
Format Command

[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or

Bit Map Writable logos on the flash memory.
Character Command

No Completion of storing
all characters
Yes

• Storing PC interface commands

• Label issue operation

NOTES: (1) Store writable characters or logos only when it is required to do so.
(2) When the flash memory is used, the memory will be taken up with every such storing if
the Format Command is not sent before storing already stored writable characters or
logos.
(3) When the flash memory is used, and another operation (storing PC interface
commands or label issue operation) is performed after storing writable characters or
logos, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) If further storing operation does not take place after storing writable characters or
logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) in about
10 seconds. In this case, when the flash memory is used, the image buffer will be
cleared automatically.

- 22 -
 (2) Storing PC interface commands

Power ON

No
<New>
(Add/change) Yes
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory.
Format Command

[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface

Save Start Command
commands.
Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed amount, cut position,
and back feed amount.

Print Density Fine Adjust

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
Command

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.

[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC

Save Terminate Command
interface commands.
No Completion of storing
all commands
Yes

• Storing writable characters or logos

• Label issue operation

NOTES: (1) Store the PC commands only when it is required to do so.

(2) When the flash memory is used, the memory will be taken up with every such storing if
the Format Command is not sent before storing already stored PC interface commands.
(3) When the flash memory is used, and another operation (storing writable characters or
logos, label issue operation) is performed after storing PC interface commands, the
image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion demands.
(5) If further storing operation does not take place after storing PC interface commands, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) in about 10 seconds. In this case,
the image buffer will be cleared automatically.

- 23 -
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION
An example of the label issue operation is described below.
(1) When the Saved Data Call Command is not used:

Power ON

Set the labels.

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed amount, cut position,
and back feed amount.
Print Density Fine
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
Adjust Command
[ESC] T: Feeds one label to align with the print start
Feed Command
position.

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Data change>
No
Yes
<Format change>

Yes No
<Label change>
No
Power OFF

NOTES: (1) When loading new type paper, the Label Size Set Command and the Feed Command
must always be sent. When using the same paper after the power is turned off and
on, the Label Size Set Command and the Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) After the power is turned off and on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the Outline
Font Format Command, and the Bar Code Format Command should be sent as
occasion demands because they are not stored in memory.

- 24 -
(2) When the Saved Data Call Command is used:

Power ON

Set the labels. [ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in the flash
memory.
Saved Data Call Command

Feed Command [ESC] T: Feeds one label to align with the print start
position.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Data change>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No

Power OFF

NOTES: (1) When loading new type paper, the Feed Command must always be sent. When
using the same paper after the power is turned off and on, the Feed Command may be
omitted.
(2) If the option for “automatic call at power on” for the Saved Data Call Command has
previously been selected, the Saved Data Call Command may be omitted after the
power is turned off and on.

(3) When the XML data is used:

Print data in XML format can be sent to the printer.
* For details, refer to the XML Data Print Specification (TAA-1320).

- 25 -
6. INTERFACE COMMANDS
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS
(1) Format of Interface command

ESC Command & Data LF NUL

The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.

There are the following three kinds of control codes:

ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H)
 { (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH)
 Code set in the system mode
(2) How to use reference

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
• Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
• An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
• “…” indicates the repetition of an item.
• Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
• Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions when
transmitted.

Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.

* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that the entry must be fixed as 3 digits.
Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Note Supplementary explanation of the command.

Refer to Related commands

Examples Explains the command examples.

[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00
[ESC] T 2 0 C 3 0 [LF] [NUL]

(3) Precautions

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification are used, the printer’s
operation will not be guaranteed. The commands must be used in the online mode. If any
command is transmitted in the system mode, the printer will not operate. However, only the
Reset Command can be used.

- 26 -
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS
(1) Commands related to setting
Label Size Set Command [ESC] D...................................... 29
(2) Commands related to fine adjustment
Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX.................................... 33
Print Density Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AY.................................... 38
Ribbon Motor Drive Voltage Fine Adjust Command [ESC] RM................................... 39
(3) Commands related to clear
Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C...................................... 40
Clear Area Command [ESC] XR ................................... 41
(4) Commands related to drawing format setting
Line Format Command [ESC] LC.................................... 43
Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC ................................... 56
Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV.................................... 61
Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB.................................... 77
(5) Commands related to print data
Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC ................................. 116
Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV ................................. 120
Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB ................................. 123
(6) Commands related to issue and feed
Issue Command [ESC] XS.................................. 136
Feed Command [ESC] T .................................... 149
Eject Command [ESC] IB ................................... 155
Forward/Reverse Feed Command [ESC] U1, [ESC] U2................. 156
(7) Commands related to writable characters
Storage Area Allocate Command [ESC] XF.................................. 158
Flash Memory Format Command [ESC] J1................................... 160
2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command [ESC] XE.................................. 161
Bit Map Writable Character Command (for flash memory) [ESC] XD ................................. 162
(8) Commands related to graphics
Graphic Command [ESC] SG ................................. 171
(9) Commands related to PC command saving
Flash Memory Format Command [ESC] J1................................... 160
Save Start Command (for flash memory) [ESC] XO ................................. 179
Save Terminate Command [ESC] XP.................................. 180
Saved Data Call Command (for flash memory) [ESC] XQ ................................. 181

- 27 -
(10) Commands related to check
Head Broken Dots Check Command [ESC] HD ................................. 182
(11) Commands related to display
Message Display Command [ESC] XJ .................................. 183
(12) Commands related to control
Reset Command [ESC] WR ................................ 185
Batch Reset Command [ESC] Z0 .................................. 202
(13) Commands related to status
Status Request Command [ESC] WS................................. 186
Receive Buffer Free Space Request Command [ESC] WB................................. 187
Version Information Acquire Command [ESC] WV................................. 188
Printer Option Status Acquire Command [ESC] WN ................................ 189
(14) Commands related to TCP/IP setting
IP Address Set Command [ESC] IP ................................... 190
Socket Communication Port Set Command [ESC] IS ................................... 191
DHCP Function Set Command [ESC] IH................................... 192
(15) Commands related to internal serial interface
Pass-through Command [ESC] @002............................. 193
Internal Serial Interface Parameter Set Command [ESC] IZ ................................... 194
(16) Commands related to parameter setting
Parameter Set Command [ESC] Z2;1 ............................... 195
Fine Adjustment Value Set Command [ESC] Z2;2 ............................... 199
RFID Parameter Set Command [ESC] Z2;3 ............................... 201
(17) Commands related to RFID
RFID Tag Position Adjustment Command [ESC] @003............................. 203
RFID Tag Read Command [ESC] WF................................. 204
RFID Void Pattern Print Command [ESC] @006............................. 206

- 28 -
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D

Function Sets the size of a label or tag paper.

Format [ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (, dddd) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Pitch length of the label or tag

4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 9999 (999.9 mm)
5 digits: 00100 (10.0 mm) to 09990 (999.0 mm)
bbbb: Effective print width
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0100 (10.0 mm) to 1057 (105.7 mm)
cccc: Effective print length
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0060 (6.0 mm) to 9970 (997.0 mm)
5 digits: 00060 (6.0 mm) to 09970 (997.0 mm)
dddd: Backing paper width
(Omissible. When omitted, the initial value is used as the effective print
width.)
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0300 (30.0 mm) to 1120 (112.0 mm)

Explanation

[Labels] Backing paper width Backing paper width

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)

Label Label
Effective pitch Effective pitch
print length print length

X Origin of
0
Effective Effective coordinates
Y
print width print width (0, 0)

Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

- 29 -
 [Tag paper] Black mark
Black mark
(Back side of the paper) (Back side of the paper)

Origin of Tag Tag

coordinates
(0, 0)

Tag Tag
Effective pitch Effective pitch
print length print length

X
0 Origin of
Effective Effective coordinates
Y
print width print width (0, 0)
Y Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
0
X
[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

[Setting range]
Black mark
(Back side of the
Stop I paper)
Stop I
position position Tag
Cut E Cut F
position position

Origin c A Origin c
H B H A

Origin d
Origin d

G
Paper feed direction G
D
C
C

[Labels] [Tags]

- 30 -
 [mm]
203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Model
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Thermal head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Thermal head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
Range of values which can be set on the software
A: Label pitch Min 10.0 25.4 19.0 10.0 25.4 19.0
Label
Tag pitch Max. 999.0 999.0
Min. 10.0 --- 19.0 10.0 --- 19.0
Tag
Max. 999.0 – 999.0 999.0 – 999.0
B: Label length Min. 8.0 23.4 13.0 80. 23.4 13.0
Max. 997.0 993.0 997.0 993.0
C: Backing paper width Min. 25.0 50.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 25.0
Tag width Max. 118.0 118.0
D: Label width Min. 23.0 47.0 23.0 23.0 47.0 23.0
Max. 118.0 118.0
E: Label-to-label gap Min. 2.0 6.0 2.0 6.0
Max. 20.0 20.0
F: Black mark length Min. 2.0 2.0
Max. 10.0 10.0
G: Effective print width Min. 10.0 10.0
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 – 11.0 8.0 – 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 – 997.0 997.0 – 997.0
I: Slow up/ Slow-up 1.0 1.0
down interval Slow-down 1.0 1.0
J: Thickness Label 130μm to 170μm
Tag 130μm to 170μm
K: Max. effective print length 499.0 499.0
for on-the-fly issuing

When a cut issue is performed, label length B should be as follows:

Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 22.0 mm −
2
Notes (1) Before changing the label size or type of sensor, the Label Size Set Command
must first be transmitted.
(2) The Label Size Set Command is stored in memory (retained even if the power is
turned off).
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, the Feed Command ([ESC] T) must
be transmitted prior to printing, to feed one piece of paper so that the print head
position aligns with the print start position.
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (print head position when
printing stops), and cut position are determined according to the parameters of the
Label Size Set Command as shown in the figure on the preceding page. For the
print stop position in strip issue mode, refer to the section of the Position Fine
Adjust Command. The effective print area is centered on the label/tag.
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.
Consequently, [A : Label pitch/Tag pitch] − [H: Effective print length] ≥ 2 mm must
be assumed.

- 31 -
 (6) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (print head position when
printing stops), and cut position are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and
according to the fine adjustment settings in the system mode.
(7) The tag rotation designation of the Issue Command ([ESC] XS) causes the origin
of drawing coordinates to be origin c in the case of “bottom first” and to be origin
d in the case of “top first”, as shown in the figure.
(8) The parameters must be as shown in the figure and table. Any value or paper
outside the range results in a failure of printing or an error.
(9) Where an effective print length is specified within the range of “max. effective print
length for on-the-fly”, non-stop printing is possible even if the data to be printed is
different one by one because printing and drawing of the next label are processed
at the same time. [On-the-fly issue]
However, printing may stop every label depending on the volume of drawing data.

. Examples (1) Labels (2) Tags

Effective
print area Black mark
(Back side of the
Label paper)
50.8 76.2
mm mm
46.8 72.2 Effective
mm mm print area

Tag

76.0 mm
Backing paper

82.0 mm 99.6 mm

[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL] [ESC] D0762, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C40 [LF] [NUL] [ESC] T10C40 [LF] [NUL]

- 32 -
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX

Function c Adjusts the feed amount so that the label stops at the position in front of or behind
the automatically set print start position.
d Adjusts the cut position so that the label is cut at a position in front of or behind the
automatically set cut position, or adjusts the strip position so that the label stops at
the position in front of or behind the automatically set strip position.
e Adjusts the reverse feed amount to the home position after a cut, or adjusts the
reverse feed amount to the home position after a strip operation.

Format [ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction of the print start position fine adjustment
+: Front
−: Behind
bbb: Fine adjustment value
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Indicates the direction of the cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment
+: Front
−: Behind
ddd: Fine adjustment value
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Indicates whether the reverse feed amount is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
−: Decrease
ff: Reverse feed amount fine adjustment value
00 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)

- 33 -
Explanation [Print Start Position Fine Adjustment]
(To finely adjust the print start position so that it shifts backward or forward)

0.0 mm

One label
Print start position

+3.0 mm

One label
Print start position

−3.0 mm

One label
Paper feed direction
Print start position

[Cut Position Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the cut position backward or forward)

0.0 mm

Cut position

+3.0 mm

Cut position

− 3.0 mm

Cut position
Paper feed direction

- 34 -
 [Strip Position Fine Adjustment]

0.0 mm

+3.0 mm

−3.0 mm

• In strip issue mode, a label is stopped at the position where

the distance between the middle point of the label-to-label gap
4 mm
and the edge of the strip shaft is 4 mm, since the label-to-label
3 mm
gap is assumed to be 2 mm.
• When the print start position is not proper, it should be
adjusted using the strip position fine adjustment function.
2 mm
• When the label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, the effective
print length should be set to the maximum (label pitch -2 mm).
Then, the print start position should be adjusted using the strip
position fine adjust function.

[Reverse Feed Amount Fine Adjustment]

(To finely adjust the reverse feed amount so that the print start position shifts backward or
forward)

0.0 mm

Print start position (home position after reverse feed)

+3.0 mm

Print start position (home position after reverse feed)

- 3.0 mm

Print start position (home position after reverse feed)

Paper feed direction

- 35 -
Notes (1) If the print start position fine adjustment (feed amount fine adjustment), cut position
(or strip position) fine adjustment or reverse feed amount fine adjustment has been
set in the system mode (by key operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value
will be the sum of the value set by this command and that in the system mode.
Each maximum fine adjustment value is as follows. However, the maximum print
start position fine adjustment (feed amount fine adjustment) value must be within
the label pitch.
Print start position fine adjustment..............................................±50.0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment............................±50.0 mm
Reverse feed amount fine adjustment ........................................±9.9 mm
(2) After changing the fine adjustment value by this command, one label must be fed
by the Feed Command ([ESC] T) to adjust the print start position.
(3) Each fine adjustment value is stored in memory (retained even if the power is
turned off).
(4) If a fine adjustment value is improper, printing will not be performed correctly.
For example, if the reverse feed amount fine adjustment value is not
properly set, the print position differs between the labels to be cut and
those not to be cut. If the label is excessively fed backward, it will not
be fed correctly during printing.
In the strip issue mode, the print start position may differ between the
first label and the second label. The reverse feed amount fine
adjustment for the strip issue is used to adjust the feed amount so that
a label is stopped at the correct position where the automatic forward
feed is ready to be performed.
(5) The cut position (or the strip position) fine adjustment and the reverse feed amount
fine adjustment are effective only when the printer is in cut issue or strip issue
mode.
(6) How the labels with the label pitch of 19 mm or less are handled in the cut issue
mode:
The minimum label pitch for the normal cut issue is 19 mm. When a label with the
label pitch of less than 19 mm is used (though it is out of specifications), the edge
of the label may be caught on the edge of the thermal head during a reverse feed
to the home position, after the gap between labels is cut. Therefore, the label
may not be return to the proper home position.
(8) Labels may not returned to the home position depending on the print conditions,
even if the same amount of reverse feed is performed. When the media sensor is
used and if the label pitch is almost the same size as the distance between the
print head and the media sensor (67.9 mm), a label/tag may not be returned to the
home position by a reverse feed after a cut issue, a strip issue, or an automatic
forward feed standby function. It may result in an error. In such cases,
increasing the reverse feed amount (fine adjusting the reverse feed amount in the
+ direction) can prevent this error.

- 36 -
Examples (1) Cut issue

3.5 mm
Cut

Pre-print
2.0 mm

2.0 mm

z
Fine adjust the print
position by +2.0 mm.
z
Fine adjust the cut
position by +3.5 mm.
z
Finely adjust the reverse
feed amount by +1.0
mm. (3.0 - 2.0 = 1.0)

3.0 mm

Cut

Paper feed
direction [ESC] AX; +020, +035, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T21C40 [LF] [NUL]

(2) Strip issue

1.0 mm 3.0 mm

z
Fine adjust the strip
ABC position by +2.0 mm.
z
Fine adjust the print ABC
position by +1.0 mm.
1.0 mm

Paper feed [ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]

direction [ESC] T20D40 [LF] [NUL]

- 37 -
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the print density which was automatically set.

Format [ESC] AY; abb, c [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density.

+: Increase (darker)
−: Decrease (lighter)
bb: Print density fine adjustment value
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
c: Indicates the print mode (thermal transfer or direct thermal)
0: Thermal transfer
1: Direct thermal

Explanation (1) The print density fine adjustment is performed by adjusting the length of time to
apply voltage to the thermal head.
(2) If the print density fine adjustment value has been set in system mode (by key
operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the value set
by this command and that in the system mode. The maximum fine adjustment
value for each of the thermal transfer and direct thermal print modes is ±10.
(3) The fine adjustment values in thermal transfer print mode and direct thermal print
mode can be set independently.
(4) The Print Density Fine Adjust Command is stored in memory (retained even if the
power is turned off).
(5) The factory default of the fine adjustment value is 00, for both the fine adjust
command and the system mode fine adjustment.
(6) The maximum adjustment value differs depending on the print speed. When the
value exceeds the maximum, it is automatically corrected to the maximum value.
203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Print speed Direct thermal Thermal transfer Direct thermal Thermal transfer
2 ips +10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step
4 ips +8 step +10 step +8 step +10 step
6 ips +8 step +10 step +8 step +10 step

Examples To set the print density to “–2” for the thermal transfer mode.
[ESC] AY; -02, 0 [LF] [NUL]
To set the print density to “+3” for the direct thermal mode.
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]

- 38 -
6.3.4 RIBBON MOTOR DRIVE VOLTAGE FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] RM

Function Fine adjusts the drive voltage of the ribbon motor.

Format [ESC] RM; abbcdd [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Direction of the ribbon take-up motor voltage fine adjustment

-: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
bb: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon take-up motor
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
c: Direction of the ribbon feed motor voltage fine adjustment
-: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
dd: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon feed motor
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)

Explanation (1) If the ribbon wrinkles, it can be solved by a find adjustment of the ribbon motor
drive voltage by this command.
(2) −1 step corresponds to −5% of the standard drive voltage.
(3) The ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment value is stored in memory (retained
even if the power is turned off).
(4) If the ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment value has been set in the system
mode (by key operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of
the value set by this command and that in the system mode. The maximum fine
adjustment values are as shown below.

Model Take-up side Feed side

Min. Max. Min. Max.
203-dpi print head model -15 +2 -15 +10
300-dpi print head model -15 +2 -15 +10

(5) When a RAM clear is performed, the fine adjustment value for each of the
command (take-up/feed) and the system mode will be reset to 00.
(6) The factory default of the fine adjustment values is 00, for both command (take-
up/feed) and the system mode.

Example To set the value for the ribbon take-up motor to “−3”, and the value for the ribbon feed
motor to “−2”.
[ESC] RM; -03-02 [LF] [NUL]

- 39 -
6.3.5 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C

Function Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics.

Format [ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared.
(2) The increment/decrement designation (described later) is effective until the Image
Buffer Clear Command is transmitted.
(3) The link field designation (described later) is effective until the Image Buffer Clear
Command is transmitted.

Examples [ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T20C41 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C41000 [LF] [NUL]

- 40 -
6.3.6 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR

Function Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated
area in the drawing area.

Format [ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: X-coordinate of the designated area start point

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Y-coordinate of the designated area start point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: X-coordinate of the designated area end point
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Y-coordinate of the designated area end point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of clear
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zero.
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.

Explanation

Backing paper Backing paper

Origin of Label Label

coordinates
(0, 0)

End point
Start point
Effective Effective
print length print length
Start point
End point

Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective Effective
X print width print width
0
Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y 0
X

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

Notes (1) Print result will be the same even if the start and end point coordinates are
reversed.
(2) Print result will be the same even if the start point is set to the upper right and the
end point is set to the lower left, respectively.
(3) The start and end point coordinates of the designated area must be set within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

- 41 -
 [Effective print area] [mm]
203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Model
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
G: Effective print width Min. 10.0 10.0
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

Example
Start point of
Origin (0, 0)
designated area

Effective print area

10.0 mm

58.5 mm Designated area

End point of designated area

34.5 mm

76.2 mm

[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 42 -
6.3.7 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC

Function Sets the line format and draws the line.

Format [ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: X-coordinate of the start point

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Y-coordinate of the start point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: X-coordinate of the end point
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: X-coordinate of the end point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical, or slant)
1: Rectangle
2: Line with dots skipped (horizontal line, vertical line)
3: Rectangle with dots skipped
f: No. of line width dots
1 to 9 or 01 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)
ggg: Radius of rounded corners of a rectangle
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not
performed.)
Fixed as 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)

Explanation

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)

Start point End

Effective point Effective
print length print length
Start
End point
point

Origin of
Effective Effective coordinates
X print width print width
0 (0, 0)
Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y 0
X

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

- 43 -
 [Line]

(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width

(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width

(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| ≤ |Y2 - Y1| ) (4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )

(X1,Y1) (X1,Y1) (X1,Y1)

Line width
(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2) (X2,Y2) (X1,Y1) Line width

Line width Line width

- 44 -
 [Rectangle]

(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000, or parameter is omitted

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width Line width

(X2,Y2) (X1,Y1)

Line width Line width

(2) Radius of rounded corners ≠ 000

(X1,Y1) Line width

Radius

(X2,Y2)
Line width

- 45 -
[Line with some dots skipped]

(1) Horizontal line

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the top and bottom areas only, which means that the thicker the
line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

(2) Vertical line

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the leftmost and rightmost areas only, which means that the
thicker the line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

[Rectangle]

(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000, or parameter is omitted

Line width + 1 dot

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)

Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the top, bottom, leftmost and rightmost areas only, which means
that the thicker the line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

- 46 -
 (2) Rounded corners of a rectangle ≠ 000

(X1,Y1) Line width + 1 dot

Radius

Line width + 1 dot (X2,Y2)

Notes (1) In case of line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A/B is drawn
according to the start and end point coordinates.
(2) Print result will be the same even if the start and end point coordinates are
reversed.
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command
([ESC] D).
(4) Designation of the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of
line is set to 1 (rectangle) or 3 (rectangle with dots skipped). When the type of
line is set to 0 or 2, designation of the radius is ignored. When the type of line is
set to 1 or 3 and the radius of the rounded corner is set to 000 or omitted, a
normal rectangle is drawn.
(5) On the following condition, a circle is supposed to be drawn:
| X2 - X1 | | Y2 - Y1 |
= ≤ [Radius of rounded corners]
2 2

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 105.7
G: Effective Min. 10.0 10.0
print width Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
length Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.4
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

- 47 -
Example
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

5.0 mm

28.0 mm
0.4 mm

20.0 mm 0.4 mm

30.5 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] LC; 0200, 0350, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 48 -
6.3.8 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC

Function Sets the format indicating where and how the bit map font is to be printed on a label.

Format c [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (=rrr------rrr) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable)
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Character horizontal magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two-digit designation enables the magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
dd
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications : 0 to 9
e: Character vertical magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two-digit designation enables the magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
ee
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications : 0 to 9
ff: Type of font 203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
A: Times Roman (Medium) 12 point 8 point
B: Times Roman (Medium) 15 point 10 point
C: Times Roman (Bold) 15 point 10 point
D: Times Roman (Bold) 18 point 12 point
E: Times Roman (Bold) 21 point 14 point
F: Times Roman (Italic) 18 point 12 point
G: Helvetica (Medium) 9 point 6 point
H: Helvetica (Medium) 15 point 10 point
I: Helvetica (Medium) 18 point 12 point
J: Helvetica (Bold) 18 point 12 point
K: Helvetica (Bold) 21 point 14 point
L: Helvetica (Italic) 18 point 12 point
M: Presentation (Bold) 27 point 18 point
N: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 point 9.5 point
O: Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5 point 7 point
P: Prestige Elite (Bold) 15 point 10 point

- 49 -
 Q: Courier (Medium) 15 point 10 point
R: Courier (Bold) 18 point 12 point
S: OCR-A 12 point 12 point
T: OCR-B 12 point 12 point
a: Reserved
to
p: Reserved
q: Gothic 725 Black
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to

40 (a): Writable character 40 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)

51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to

55 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 5 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
a: Drive
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
* Fonts A to L, and q are proportional fonts.
ghh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
−: Decrease
hh: No. of space dots between characters
00 to 99 (in units of dots)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)
j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)

- 50 -
 C (aa): Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character magnification (horizontal or vertical magnifications,
whichever is larger) × 6 dots.)
Jkkll: Bold character designation
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)
kk: No. of horizontal shift dots
00 to 16 (in units of dots)
ll: No. of vertical shift dots
00 to 16 (in units of dots)
Mm: Type of check digits to be attached.
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed)
m: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
oooooooooo: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Zpp: Zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
pp: No. of digits after zero suppression
00 to 20
Pq: Alignment (Omissible, When omitted, the alignment is set to left.)
q: Designates the character position
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Justification
aaaa: Character string area of X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
5aaaabbbcc: Automatic line feed
aaaa: Character string area of X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
bbb: Line feed spacing
010 to 500 (in 1 mm units)
cc: Number of lines
01 to 99

- 51 -
 rrr------rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

Explanation (1) Character string number

When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing paper

Origin of
coordinates Label Label
(0, 0)

Sample
Effective Effective Print origin
print length print length of coordinates
Print origin
of coordinates

Origin of
coordinates
Effective print Y Effective print
X (0, 0)
0 width width

X 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the characters are drawn within the effective
print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
G: Effective print width Min. 10.0 10.0
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

- 52 -
 (3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification

Vertical
magnification Horizontal
magnification

Horizontal Vertical
magnification magnification

[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]

Char. height ×
Vertical
magnification

Char.
Enlarge
height
Point of
origin

Char. width Char. Width ×

Left offset Point of
Point of Horizontal magnification Point of
origin of
origin origin of
Horizontal spacing/ next char.
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing) next char.
proportional spacing × Horizontal magnification

- 53 -
(4) Type of font

A: Times Roman:
B: Times Roman
C: Times Roman
D: Times Roman
E: Times Roman
F: Times Roman
G: Helvetica
H: Helvetica
I: Helvetica
J: Helvetica
K: Helvetica
L: Helvetica

M: Presentation

N: Letter Gothic
O: Prestige Elite
P: Prestige Elite
Q: Courier
R: Courier
S: OCR-A
T: OCR-B
q: Gothic 725 Black

- 54 -
 (5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character. When character-to-character space is
specified, drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the
character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.

Point of
origin
Point of origin of
next char.

(Horizontal spacing/proportional No. of fine adjust space dots

spacing) × Horizontal magnification between characters

(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

(7) Selection of character attribution

No. of dots in the
horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

- 55 -
 (8) Bold character designation

0° 90°

Horizontally Vertically Vertically/

Horizontally Vertically Vertically/
bold bold horizontally
bold bold horizontally
bold
bold

(9) Check digit to be attached

When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing.
In case of Modulus 10, when the data includes any data other than numerals, drawing is
not performed. In case of Modulus 43, when the data includes any data other than
CODE39, drawing is not performed, either.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only
the check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than numerals, drawing
is not performed. When the font type is e, j, v, or w, the check digit cannot be designated.
(Even if it is designated, it is ignored, and the printer operates as if there was no
designation.)
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

(10) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. When the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will
not be drawn. When the font type is e, j, v, w, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, the
incrementing/decrementing cannot be designated. (Even if it is designated, it is ignored,
and the printer operates as if there was no designation.)

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

- 56 -
 Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for
incrementing/decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the
data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(11) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is greater than the data
row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero suppression. Where the data row exceeds
the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn. When the font type is e, j, v, w,
51, 52, 53, 54 or 55, zero suppression is not designated. (Even if it is designated, it is ignored, and
the printer operates as if there was no designation.)

(12) Alignment
No. of dots of character string
area in the X direction

Designated origin Left Center Right J u s t i f y

Automatic line feed

Line feed spacing Automatic line feed No. of lines
Automatic line feed

If characters are not placed on one line when the justification and the automatic line feed
are designated, the following steps are performed.
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed
on one line even if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5.
If characters are still not placed on one line, repeatedly decrease the value of the
character-to-character space, and then reduce the horizontal magnification. When
characters are not placed on one line if the character magnification is set to 0.5 and the
character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field
is also not drawn.)

- 57 -
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits of characters can be printed. When the type of font is e, j, v, or w,
the maximum number of characters is 127. If the number of digits exceeds 255, the
excessive data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;”. After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

- 58 -
Notes

(1) Attachment of the check digit, increment/decrement, and zero suppression are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,
no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression, but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be
calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is kept incremented
or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 003 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB - 0100

0002

AB - 0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB - 0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

- 59 -
 (3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) In case that the drawing data differs for every label, the field of the drawing data
for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character string number,
then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string number
should be designated so that they differ according to the drawing fields. Since the
automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and
Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same
character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the
same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command
is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)

Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)

- 60 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)

(1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm
30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 61 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 62 -
6.3.9 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV

Function Sets the format to indicate where and how the outline font is to be printed.

~ Fonts other than TrueType font

Format c [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (=ppp------ppp) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (; qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee: Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
f: Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)
E: Price Font 1
F: Price Font 2
G: Price Font 3
H: DUTCH801 Bold (Times Roman Proportional)
I: BRUSH738 Regular (Pop Proportional)
J: GOTHIC725 Black (Proportional)
ghhh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. When omitted, the space is adjusted according to the
designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
−: Decrease
hhh: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in units of dots)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)

- 63 -
j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa): Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Parameter in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character size (the character width or height, whichever is
greater) ÷ 8 dots.)
Mk: Type of the check digit to be attached
(Omissible. When omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)
k: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
−: Decrement
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Znn: Zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
nn: No. of digits after zero suppression
00 to 20

- 64 -
Po: Alignment (Omissible. When omitted, the alignment is set to the left.)
o: Designates the character position.
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Justification
aaaa: X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 65 -
~ TrueType font

Format [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, ff, g (, hiii), jj, k (=ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee: Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
ff: Type of font
01: BalloonPExtBol (File name: Ballp_eb.ttf)
02: BlacklightD (File name: Blklt_rg.ttf)
03: BrushScrD (File name: Brush_rg.ttf)
04: CG Times (File name: Tec_cgt.ttf)
05: CG Times Bold (File name: Tec_cgtb.ttf)
06: CG Times Italic (File name: Tec_cgti.ttf)
07: Clarendon Condensed Bold (File name: Tec_clcd.ttf)
08: FlashPBol (File name: Flash_bd.ttf)
09: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett (File name: Tec_gmkh.ttf)
10: GoudyHeaP (File name: Gdyhp_rg.ttf)
11: GilliesGotDBol (File name: Gilli_bd.ttf)
12: GilliesGotLig (File name: Gilli_lt.ttf)
13: NimbusSanNovTUltLigCon (File name: Nsnct_ul.ttf)
14: Ryahd (File name: ryahd.ttf)
15: Ryahd Bold (File name: ryahdbd.ttf)
16: CG Triumvirate (File name: Trium.ttf)
17: CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold (File name: Triumcb.ttf)
18: Univers Medium (File name: Tec_uni.ttf)
19: Univers Bold (File name: Tec_unib.ttf)
20: Univers Medium Italic (File name: Tec_unii.ttf)
21: add_on TrueTypeFont 1
22: add_on TrueTypeFont 2
23: add_on TrueTypeFont 3
24: add_on TrueTypeFont 4
25: add_on TrueTypeFont 5

(*1) The font types 21 to 25 are the fonts to be added by the user.
(*2) For the fonts stored in flash ROM on the CPU board, parameter “ff” for
the type of font corresponds to the font type according to the setting
made when fonts are stored.

- 66 -
g: Drive
(Omissible. When omitted, files are stored in the flash ROM on the CPU
board.)
Indicates where the TrueType font files are stored.
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
hiii: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. When omitted, the space is adjusted according to the
designated font.)
h: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
−: Decrease
iii: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in units of dots)
jj: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)
k: Character attribution
B: Black character
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
* TrueType fonts are not included in the standard character generator data. Therefore,
they must be installed in flash ROM on the CPU board.
For installation of TrueType font and details, refer to the TrueType Font Specification
(TAA-1416).
* If Arabic is selected as the character code, letters are written from right to left.

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

- 67 -
Explanation (1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing

paper
Origin of Label
coordinates Label
(0, 0) Print origin of
coordinates

Sample
Effective Effective
print length print length

Origin of
Print origin of
coordinates
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective Effective
X print width print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y 0
X
[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

• The print origin of coordinates must be set so the character drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

[Effective print area] [mm]

203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Model
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
G: Effective print width Min. 10.0 10.0
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

- 68 -
(3) Character width and character height

Char.
height Char.
height

Char.
width

Char. Standard size Char. width

height (256 × 256 dots)

Char.
width

(4) Type of font

A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])

B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)

- 69 -
E: Price font 1 (POP font)

F: Price font 2 (POP font)

G: Price font 3 (POP font)

H: DUTCH801 Bold (Times Roman Proportional)

- 70 -
 I: BRUSH 738 Regular (Pop Proportional)

J: GOTHIC725 Black

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots
between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal
spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-to-
character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified
value. When justify is selected for the alignment, the character-to-character
space setting is invalid. (The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is
increased or decreased depending on the character size.)

ABC

A B

- 71 -
 (6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

(7) Selection of character attribution No. of dots in the

horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

(8) Check digit to be attached

When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is
calculated and attached to the data row for drawing. In case of Modulus 10,
when the data includes any data other than numerals, drawing is not performed.
In case of Modulus 43, when the data includes any data other than CODE39,
drawing is not performed, either.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and
only the check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than
numerals, drawing is not performed.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

- 72 -
(9) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(10) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123
Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero
suppression. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data
row will not be drawn.

Character string length in the

(11) Alignment X direction (in 0.1 mm units)

Origin Left Center Right J u s t i

If characters are not placed on one line when justification is designated, the width is
calculated automatically. When the width is less than the limit value (2 mm) for the
outline font, that field is not drawn. (The same previous field is not drawn.)

- 73 -
(12) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. When the type of font is 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30, the
maximum number of characters is 127. When the number of digits exceeds the
maximum value, the excessive data will be discarded. For the character code table,
refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE TABLE”.

(13) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PV01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PV02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PV04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PV05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating the link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

- 74 -
Notes (1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement, and zero suppression are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions are
improper, no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression, but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Examples]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 03 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB-0100

0002

AB-0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB-0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]

- 75 -
 (4) When the drawing data differs for every label, the drawing data field for the
previous label is automatically cleared using the character string number, then the
next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string number should be
designated so that they differ according to the drawing fields. Since the
automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and
Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same
character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the
fields with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the
Clear Command is sent.)
(5) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment,
the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjustment value so
that characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters
are positioned over the outline font area, the outline font is not painted properly.
For font types A and B, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other
drawings do not overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For
font types C, E, F and G, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other
drawings do not overlap the area of the designated character width and height.
(6) The link field designation can be cleared by omitting the link field designation
using the same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(7) A print data string and the link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)

Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)

- 76 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)

( 1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm 30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 77 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 78 -
6.3.10 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate where and how the bar code is to be printed and how it is to
be printed.

~ In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC,
KIX CODE
(WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
5: JAN13, EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
8: EAN13 + 5 digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I: EAN8 + 2 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: UCC/EAN128
R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S)
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE)
(Postal code for U.K)
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)
b: GTIN

- 79 -
e: Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
3: Check digit automatic attachment (1)
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
UCC/EAN128 Modulus 10 + Modulus 103
Customer code Special check digit
POSTNET Special check digit
RM4SCC Special check digit
4: Check digit automatic attachment (2)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
5: Check digit automatic attachment (3)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
* For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, and RMC4SCC, only “3:
Check digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
k: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RMC4SCC, and KIX CODE, the
height of the long bar is specified.
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
−: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
ooo: Length of WPC guard bar
(Omissible. When omitted, the guard bar is not extended.)
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. When omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print

- 80 -
qq: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement”, “Selection of print or non-
print of numerals under bars” and “No. of digits after zero suppression”) cannot be set
when the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC, or KIX CODE is selected.

- 81 -
~ In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, Industrial 2 of 5, MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(=sss------sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (standard)
4: NW7
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)
O: Industrial 2 of 5
a: MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
e: Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC Modulus check character
3: Check digit automatic attachment (1)
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC Modulus check character
4: Check digit automatic attachment (2)
MSI IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10
ITF DBP Modulus 10
5: Check digit automatic attachment (3)
MSI IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10
ff: Narrow bar width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
gg: Narrow space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, designate an element-to-element space.
hh: Wide bar width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)

- 82 -
ii: Wide space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed to 00.
jj: Character-to-character space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of MSI and ITF, character-to-character space width is fixed to 00.
k: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. When omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
qq: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
r: Designates the attachment of start/stop code
(Omissible. When omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)
T: Attachment of start code only
P: Attachment of stop code only
N: Start/stop code unattached
sss------sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on
the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 83 -
~ In the case of RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF]
[NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
b: RSS family
e: Version (Type of RSS)
1: RSS-14
2: RSS-14 Stacked
3: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
4: RSS Limited
5: RSS Expanded
6: RSS Expanded Stacked
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
ijjjjjjjjjj: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
kk: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar
code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 84 -
~ In the case of Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ooo)
[LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)
(; pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
Q: Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
ee: ECC type
00: ECC0
01: ECC50
04: ECC50
05: ECC50
06: ECC80
07: ECC80
08: ECC80
09: ECC100
10: ECC100
11: ECC140
12: ECC140
13: ECC140
14: ECC140
20: ECC200
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 99 (in units of dots)
gg: Format ID
01: Format ID 1
02: Format ID 2
03: Format ID 3
04: Format ID 4
05: Format ID 5
06: Format ID 6
* When ECC200 is designated as ECC type, the format ID designation is ignored.
When format ID of 11 through 16 is designated, ECC200 is automatically selected (to
ensure compatibility with the old model).

- 85 -
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciiijjj: No. of cells
(Omissible. When omitted, it is automatically set.)
iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144
jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144
* Cell setting method varies according to the ECC type.
ECC0 to ECC140 ECC200
No. of cells to be Odd numbers only Even numbers only
designated
Min./Max. No. of cells 9 × 9 to 49 × 49 10 × 10 to 144 × 144
Rectangular code None 18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16

• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically

set. Also, when any data other than the above values are
designated for the number of cells in the X and Y directions, the
number of cells are automatically set.
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting
(Omissible. When omitted, connection is not made.)
kk: Code number 01 to 16
ll: No. of divided codes 02 to 16
mmm: ID number 1 001 to 254
nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254
ooo ------ ooo: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits.
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 86 -
~ In the case of PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee: Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in units of dots)
gg: No. of columns (strings)
01 to 30
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2,000 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 87 -
~ In the case of MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee: Security level
00: Fixed
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg: No. of columns/rows
00 to 38
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 366 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 88 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates the numbers of columns/rows which are automatically set by the
printer. In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected.
When the numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns are selected.

- 89 -
~ In the case of QR code (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (; oo1, oo2, oo3 ------ oo20)
[LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)
e: Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 52 (in units of dots)
g: Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h: Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Mi: Selection of model
(Omissible. When omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Kj: Mask number
(Omissible. When omitted, the number is automatically set.)
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8: No mask
Jkkllmm: Connection setting
(Omissible. When omitted, connection is not made.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all print data (before devided) which have
been XORed in units of bytes.
nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.

- 90 -
~ In the case of MaxiCode Code (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
Z: MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)
e: Mode selection (Omissible)
• When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE1: Compatible with the
current version” in the system mode.
Omitted: Mode 2
0: Mode 2
1: Mode 4
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
5: Mode 2
6: Mode 6
7: Mode 2
8: Mode 2
9: Mode 2
• When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE2: Special specification”
in the system mode.
Omitted: Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
0: Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
1: Mode 4
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
5: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
6: Mode 6
7: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
8: Mode 2 or MODE 3 (*)
9: Mode 2 or MODE 3 (*)
*: Mode 2 or Mode 3 should be determined depending on the country
code of the data command. When the country code is 840, Mode 2
should be selected. For other codes than 840, Mode 3 should be
selected.
Jffgg: Connection setting (Omissible. When omitted, connection is not made.)
ff: Code number 01 to 08
gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08
Zh: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
(Omissible. When omitted, they are not attached.)
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block

- 91 -
~ In the case of CP code (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Ciijj) (= kkkk --- kkk) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Ciijj) (; ll1, ll2, ll3, --- ll20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
Y: CP code (Two-dimensional code)
e: Designation of ECC (Error Correction Code) level
0: No designation
1: 10%
2: 20%
3: 30%
4: 40%
5: 50%
Only when the number of code characters are specified, “0” (No designation)
can be selected. If “0 (No designation)” is selected without specifying the
number of code characters, the CP code is not printed. When the number
of code characters are specified, blank code areas created after the
characters are encoded should all be filled with ECC characters.
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 99 (in units of dots)
g: No. of character bits
0: Automatically set
A: 8 bits
Designates how many bits are used for representing a character.
When “0” is designated, the optimal value is automatically set, according to
data.
h: Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciijj: No. of code characters
(When omitted, it is automatically set.)
ii = No. of characters in the X direction: 03 to 22
jj = No. of characters in the Y direction: 02 to 22
“Character” is a unit for code for encoding the CP code.
1 character occupies a 3×3-square block.
When the value for “jj” is larger than that for “ii”, an error occurs.
The number of cells for the code is as follows.
(No. of characters × 3 +2)

- 92 -
kkkk --- kkk: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 473 digits
ll1, ll2, ll3, --- ll20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.

- 93 -
~ In the case of RFID

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, (, Aeee) (= fff --- fff) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, (, Aeee) (; gg1, gg2, gg3, --- gg20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Parameter not referred to
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Parameter not referred to
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
r: RFID
eee: Address where the data is written (Omissible)
000 to 999
Designates the address where data starts to be written.
This parameter is effective only when ISO18000-6B tag is used. When
omitted, it is set to 18.
fff --- fff: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 512 digits
However, it varies depending on the tag types.
gg1, gg2, gg3, --- gg20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.

- 94 -
Explanation (1) Bar code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the
bar code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the bar code drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

[Effective print area] [mm]

203-dpi print head 300-dpi print head
Model
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
Min. 10.0 10.0
G: Effective print width
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

- 95 -
(3) Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8 1: MSI

2: Interleaved 2 of 5 3: CODE39 (standard)

4: NW7 5: JAN13, EAN13

6: UPC-E 7: EAN13 + 2 digits

8: EAN13 +5 digits 9: A: CODE128

B: CODE39 (Full ASCII) C: CODE93

G: UPC-E + 2 digits H: UPC-E + 5 digits

I: EAN8 + 2 digits J: EAN8 + 5 digits

K: UPC-A L: UPC-A + 2 digits

- 96 -
M: UPC-A + 5 digits N: UCC/EAN128

O: Industrial 2 of 5 P: PDF417

Q: Data Matrix R: Customer bar code

S: Highest priority customer bar code T: QR code

U: POSTNET V: RM4SCC

W: KIX code X: MicroPDF417

Y: CP Code Z: MaxiCode

- 97 -
 b: RSS family
RSS-14 RSS-14 Stacked

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional RSS-14 Limited

RSS Expanded

RSS Expanded Stacked

(4) Type of check digit

c When no check digit is attached, a bar code of the data row will be drawn.
d In the case of the check digit check, when each check digit check is performed
according to the type of bar code and results in normal, a bar code will be
drawn. If the check digit is not proper, the bar code will not be drawn.
e In case that the check digit is automatically attached, each check digit is
attached according to the type of bar code when a bar code is drawn.
f If the type of bar code is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or
UCC/EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the
designation of the type of check digit.
g If the type of bar code is JAN, EAN, or UPC, the designation of no check digit
attachment automatically assumes the check digit check.
h DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

- 98 -
 (5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to
the type of bar code. Note that the proper value differs according to the
rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used, etc.
Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/12 mm)
In case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, PDF417, or
MicroPDF417, the width of 2 to 6 modules is automatically calculated by
designating a 1-module width.

[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Type of bar code
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC 3 6 9 12 - -
CODE93 2 4 6 8 - -
CODE128, EAN128 2 4 6 8 - -
PDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12
MicroPDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12

Narrow Wide Character-to-

Type of bar code
Bar Space Bar Space character space
MSI 2 2 6 6 0
ITF 2 2 6 6 0
CODE39 2 2 6 6 2
NW7 2 2 6 6 2
Industrial 2 of 5 2 2 6 0 2
MATRIX 2 of 5 2 2 6 6 2

300-dpi print head

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Type of bar code
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC 4 8 12 16 - -
CODE93 3 6 9 12 - -
CODE128, EAN128 3 6 9 12 - -
PDF417 3 6 9 12 15 18
MicroPDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12

Narrow Wide Character-to-

Type of bar code
Bar Space Bar Space character space
MSI 3 3 8 8 0
ITF 3 3 8 8 0
CODE39 3 3 8 8 3
NW7 3 3 8 8 3
Industrial 2 of 5 3 3 8 0 3
MATRIX 2 of 5 3 3 8 8 3

When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes a space equals to ‘a
narrow space ×12 dots’. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.

- 99 -
In the case of Data Matrix or CP code
1-cell width When 1-cell width is set to 00 for the Data
Matrix or CP code, a two-dimensional code
1-cell width = 3 is not drawn. However, the bar code
printed on the previous label is cleared.

- 100 -
 In the case of QR code 1-cell width

1-cell width

When the 1-cell width is set to 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the
bar code printed on the previous label is cleared.

In the case of a customer code

1-module width

(6) Rotational angle of bar code

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

- 101 -
(7) Bar code height

Height

Height

[PDF417, MicroPDF417]

Height

Height
[Postal code]

Height

[RSS-14]

Height

[RSS-14 Stacked]
Height (The height of the bottom row is 7/5 of the specified height.)

[RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional]

Height (The height of the bottom row is the same as the specified height.)

- 102 -
 [RSS-14 Limited]

Height

[RSS-14 Expanded]

Height

When the bar code height is set to 0000, a bar code (including guard bars) and
numerals under bars are not drawn. However, the bar code printed on the
previous label is cleared.

(8) Length of guard bar

The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC.
It is ignored in all other cases.

Height of bar code

Length of guard bar

(9) Numerals under bars

Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for
print/non print of numerals under bars. The numerals under bars to be printed
vary according to the type of bar code. The font of numerals under bars is OCR-
B. These numerals are enlarged or reduced only horizontally according to the
width of the bar code. When they are drawn vertically, no enlargement or
reduction is applied.
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]
c In the case of JAN and EAN
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits

(Example) EAN8

- 103 -
 d In the case of UPC
(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits

(Example) UPC-E

e In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC
(Example) CODE39

(Example) UCC/EAN128

(10) Start/Stop Code

y This parameter is valid only when the type of bar code is CODE39 and NW7.
y When the parameter is designated, whether or not the stop code and the start code are
attached to the print data to be sent is not checked.
y When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will
be attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case
of NW7.
y For details, refer to chapter 15 “AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES”.

- 104 -
(11) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code
(code A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2.

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII), NW-7, CODE93, CODE128, even if a
data string other than numerals are included in the data, increment/decrement is
performed. However, if any code which does not exist in each bar code table is
contained in the data, increment/decrement is not performed.
Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible. Only the
numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are
returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128

Increment/decrement calculation starts from the lowest digit in the data strings. If the
data string to be calculated is numeric and the next (upper) digit is “>”, this data is a
special code (underlined digits shown in the table below). In such case, these two
digits are skipped, and the next digit is calculated.
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128

Initial value 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08

INC/DEC +1 +1 +1 +1
1st label 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08
2nd label 00001 00>09 0A>09 0A9>09
3rd label 00002 01>00 1A>00 1A0>00
4th label 00003 01>01 1A>01 1A0>01
5th label 00004 01>02 1A>02 1A0>02

- 105 -
(12) Zero suppression
No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero
suppression. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data
row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop codes are sent, the start/stop codes are also
counted as a digit each. When the bar code type is JAN, EAN, UPC, or UCC/EAN 128,
the data will be drawn without performing zero suppression.
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar
codes. For codes, refer to chapter 13 “BAR CODE TABLE”.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data string are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating the link field No.

- 106 -
 [Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

(15) Explanation for Data Matrix

c ECC type
Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correction code (ECC) and restore normal data. The ECC should be chosen from
several types of ECCs according to usage. The general correction ability is as
follows. However, it may vary according to the error conditions.

ECC type Error Correction Ability Overhead by ECC

ECC0 0%
Low
ECC50 25%
ECC80 33%
ECC100 High 50%
ECC140 75%
ECC200 Approx. 30%

d Format ID
Data Matrix can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since
data compression rate varies according to codes, a code to be used is designated
using the format ID.

Format ID Code Details

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space
2 Letters A to Z space
3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space
5 ASCII (7 bit) 00H to 7FH
6 ISO (8 bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji)

- 107 -
e Maximum number of digits
The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type or format ID.
Since a Kanji character uses 2 bytes, its maximum number of digits becomes half of
the following values.

ECC0 ECC50 ECC80 ECC100 ECC140

Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144
Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105
Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91
Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96
Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72
Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556

For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.
f Connection setting
The connection setting is used when the data cannot be expressed with a two-
dimensional code. Data is comprised of more than one two-dimensional code.
When three two-dimensional codes are used to comprise data, for example,
identification information of 1/3, 2/3, and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional
code. The ID number is assigned to identify the proper combination of two-
dimensional codes when plural connecting symbols are printed on one label. For
example, when there are two kinds of data containing identification information for 1/2
and 2/2 in the same label, combination of two-dimensional codes is unclear. By
adding the ID number, the combination is made clearer.

- 108 -
Cell size and the effective data capacity

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140

Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte
capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity
Row Col

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – –
11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – –
13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – –
15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – –
17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1
19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3
21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5
23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7
25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10
27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13
29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16
31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20
33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24
35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63

- 109 -
 ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

- 110 -
(16) Explanation for the PDF417 and MicroPDF417
c Security level
The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be
designated according to usage.
For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

d No. of columns (strings)

The number of rows and the row length (No. of data strings) are variable in the
PDF417. Therefore, the form of the symbol can be changed in the proportion of the
height and width in accordance with the paper to be used.
The number of columns (the number of data strings) is varied between 1 and 30.
If the number of columns is set to too small though the data volume is large and the
security level is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of
rows may exceed 90 when the number of columns is too small. (When the PDF417
is used, the number of rows of symbols is limited in a range from 3 to 90.)
For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the
number of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated,
see the table. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg) varies
according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for the set
parameter (gg) is set, a bar code is not printed. The number of columns (data
strings) is varied in a range from 1 to 4.
Though the max. number of lines is 44, it depends on the number of columns.

(17) Explanation for QR code

c Error correction level
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the data can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels of error correction. The level should be specified according to
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.

Overhead by correcting
Level Error correction ability
an error
High density level Low 7%
Standard level 15%
Reliability level 25%
High reliability level High 30%

- 111 -
d 1-cell width 1-cell width

1-cell width

When the 1-cell width is set to 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the
bar code printed on the previous label is cleared.
e Selection of mode
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.
f Selection of model
Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.
g Mask number
It is preferable that the black and white modules are arranged in well-balanced
manner so that a QR code is read for sure. The mask number prevents the bit
pattern “1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern,
from appearing in the symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is ranging from 0 to 7. The pattern of the code is determined by
placing each masking pattern for the mask number over the module pattern. When
the mask number is set to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is
omitted, the most appropriate mask number is automatically selected to perform
masking.
h Connection setting
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though the print space is
limited, divided codes can be printed there. The data can be divided into a max. of
16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all input data in units of bytes before
dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for
others. Examples are shown below:
“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89 ”.
Code No. 1 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “0123”
Code No. 2 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “4567”
Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “89 ”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 ”.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 85

- 112 -
(18) Explanation for MaxiCode
c Connection setting
For MaxiCode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes.

(19) Explanation for CP code

c ECC (Error Correction Code) level
The CP code contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The error correction level should be
selected according to usage.
The higher the percentage of the error correcting code word is, the higher the error
correcting ability is.
For the CP code, the program is designed so that all remaining areas are used for
correcting errors when the number of code characters is specified by a user. When
the number of code characters is specified, “0” (No designation) can be used.
When the number of code characters is not specified by a user, a value must be
selected from a range of 10 to 50%. The printer automatically determines the
number of code characters so that the error correcting code word exceeds the
percentage specified by user.
d The number of bits per character
Data is compressed by using the 8-bit compression method. Even if “0” is specified,
the data will be compressed in the same way.
Character set for 8 bits
8 bits: ISO 00H to FFH (for Kanji)
e The number of code characters
For the CP code, a 3×3-cell is used for one block, and a CP code consists of these
blocks.
The numbers of characters in the X and Y directions can be set by a user.
If “0” is specified, the printer automatically sets the smallest code size that can contain
the data set by the user.
The rectangular code can be also specified. In that case, the value for the Y
direction must be smaller than the X direction.
The number of cells per code is as follows.
(No. of code characters) × 3 + 2

- 113 -
 (20) Explanation for RFID
c The number of bytes to be written
.The number of bytes to be written on the tag depends on the type of tag.
d Sequence of writing data on the RFID tag
Data is written on the RFID tag prior to printing. When +3-mm or more feed, or a –3-
mm or less feed has been set in the @003 command, the printer performs a
forward/reverse feed before printing, according to the command setting.
When writing data onto the RFID tag succeeds, the printer feeds the paper in the
direction opposite to the feed performed before data write, and then starts printing.
If writing data fails, and when the parameter of RFID adjustment for retry has been set
to +3mm or more, or –3mm or less in the system mode, the printer performs a
forward/reverse feed again and retries to write data.
If writing data failed after all, the printer prints the void pattern on that paper to
abandon it, and retries the next tag up to the maximum number of RFID issue retries.

Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement, and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will take
place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit

(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If
the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field to
be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.

- 114 -
 [Example]
c Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1))
d Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2))
e Image Buffer Clear Command
f Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”)
g Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”)
h Issue Command (2 labels)

(0001)

(0100)

(0002)

(0102)

i Issue Command (1 label)

(0003)

(0104)

j Image Buffer Clear Command

k Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”)
l Issue Command (1 label)

(3000)

(3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data differs for every label, the field of the drawing data for the previous
label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next drawing data is
printed. Therefore, the bar code number should be designated so that they differ according
to the drawing fields. Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear
Command ([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using
the same bar code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same bar
code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)

- 115 -
 (5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same bar
code No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(6) A print data string and the link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

Examples
Origin (0, 0)
(1)

12.5
mm Effective print area

15.0
mm
55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 116 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 117 -
 (3)
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 118 -
6.3.11 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC

Function Provides data for the bit map font row.

Format c [ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RC; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
(Max. 127 digits when the font type is e, j, v, or w.)
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE
TABLE”.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

Explanation (1) Link field data string

• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is
e, j, v, or w, only up to 127 digits can be linked.
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due
to the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)

Refer to Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

- 119 -
Examples

Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 120 -
 (2) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 121 -
 (3)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

12.5
mm
30.0
mm

20.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, X, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, X, 01, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 122 -
6.3.12 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV

Function Provides data for the outline font row.

Format c [ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RV; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE
TABLE”.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

Explanation (1) Link field data string

• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. Data exceeding the max.
number of digits will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)

Refer to Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)

- 123 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 124 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 125 -
6.3.13 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND [ESC] RB

Function Provides data for the bar code.

Format c [ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RB; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar code.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
The Data Command for the MaxiCode is described later.

Explanation (1) Data check

If the data row contains data which does not meet the type of bar code, a bar code
will not be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of
CODE128 (without auto code selection), the bar code will not be drawn.
In case of Data Matrix, if there is data different from the one designated using the
format ID, a symbol is not drawn.
(2) No. of digits of data
When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will
be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code, see below.
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code: 2000 digits
CP code: 473 digits
MicroPDF417: 366 digits
MaxiCode: 93 digits
Customer bar code: 20 digits
Highest priority customer bar code: 19 digits
POSTNET: 5, 9, 11 digits
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits
KIX CODE: 18 digits
Bar codes other than the above 126 digits
When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code type, the bar code
is not drawn.
For the MaxiCode, the maximum number of digits varies according to the mode.
In mode 2 or mode 3, the maximum number of digits is 84. In mode 4 or mode 6,
the maximum number of digits is 93, respectively.

- 126 -
 The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for
ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number
of digits becomes half of the values described below since a Kanji character
occupies 2 bytes.
Maximum number of digits for Data Matrix

ECC0 ECC50 ECC80 ECC100 ECC140

Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144
Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105
Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91
Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96
Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72
Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556

The maximum writable data volume on the RFID is 512 bytes. However, the
actually writable data volume varies according to the type of tag to be used.

Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140

Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte
capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity
Row Col

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – –
11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – –
13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – –
15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – –
17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1
19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3
21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5
23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7
25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10
27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13
29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16
31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20
33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24
35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63

- 127 -
 ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

- 128 -
When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters, called
code words, is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate
varies according to the data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits
according to modes is as follows.
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the
maximum values become smaller than the values below, since the internal mode
selection code is used.
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value
becomes further smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of rows
exceeds 90, a symbol is not drawn.
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified.
The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.
In the case of PDF417
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode: 1108 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 2000 digits
In the case of MicroPDF417
• Binary mode: 150 digits
• Upper case letter/space mode: 250 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 366 digits

No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417 For the MicroPDF417, the printer
sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

- 129 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

- 130 -
(3) CODE128 code selection
In the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in
the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)
c Determining the start character
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
to be used is (CODE C).
(b) In any case other than (a) in c, if a control character appears before a
small letter (see f.) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
is (CODE A).
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).
d If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a), c:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric
data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the
number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric
data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should
conform to (b) and (c) in c.
e If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character just before the first numeric data.
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character immediately after the first numeric data.
f If a control character appears in (CODE B):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next
control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first control character.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control
character.
g If a small letter appears in (CODE A):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next
small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first small letter.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small
letter.
h If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other
than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform
to (b) and (c) in c.

- 131 -
(4) CODE128 code selection check
Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been
set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn.
[Conditions causing an error]
c No start code is designated.
d A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).
e A control character is found in (CODE B).
f Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found
in (CODE C).
g There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.
h The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.
i (SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).
(5) Kanji code selection
• In the case of Data Matrix, PDF417, and QR code, Kanji codes can be printed.
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8, or the mixture of these codes can be used.
(6) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 2000 digits of data strings of Data Matrix or PDF417 can be linked. For
other bar code types, up to 126 digits can be linked. (The value varies
according to the type of bar code.)
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV”, or “RB” command
code is designated.)

- 132 -
(7) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
c Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

d Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

e Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

The QR code can contain all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is
designated when the mode is selected.

Mode Code Details

N Numerals 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

(8) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.

Data to be printed

(9) How to transmit the control code data

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H)

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH)

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH)
* How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H)

- 133 -
(10) Transfer code for QR code

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.
(11) Examples of data designation
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode : 123456
Kanji mode : Kanji data
Binary mode : a i u e o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o ,A
ABData
C to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed data strings printed

Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

- 134 -
(12) MaxiCode data
For mode 2 or 3:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 4 or 6:
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]
c bbbbbbbbb: Postal code Fixed as 9 digits
• Mode 2:
b1b2b3b4b5: Zip code Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics)
b6b7b8b9: Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics)
• Mode 3:
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code Fixed as 6 digits (Character of code
set A)
b7b8b9: Vacant Fixed as 3 digits (20H)
d ccc: Class of service Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
e ddd: Country code Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
f eee --- eee: Message data strings 84 digits
g fffffffff: Primary message data strings 9 digits
h ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings 84 digits

NOTES: 1. When any data other than numerics is included in the data string of zip
code (mode 2), zip code extension, class of service, or country code, a
MaxiCode is not drawn.
2. If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected,
the printer adds one digit of CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the
remaining digits will be filled with FSs (011100). When message data
exceeding 84 digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before
drawing a MaxiCode.
3. If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when
mode 4 or 6 is selected, the printer adds one digit of CR (000000) at the
end of the data, and the remaining digits will be filled with FSs (011100).
When message data exceeding 93 digits is received, the excess data
will be discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
4. Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for
scanner programming.
5. When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification
setting in the system mode and when Mode 2 is selected, the country
code must be 840. Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be drawn.
6. When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification
setting in the system mode and when Mode 3 is selected, the country
code must be other than 840. Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be
drawn.

- 135 -
Examples

(1) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

15.0 mm

55.0 mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 136 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 137 -
 (3)
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

- 138 -
6.3.14 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS

Function Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.

Format [ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Number of labels to be issued

0001 to 9999
bbb: Cut interval. Designates the number of pieces to be printed before a cut
operation is performed.
000 to 100 (000 when no cut)
c: Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor
3: Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value)
4: Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
d: Issue mode
C: Batch mode
D: Strip mode (with reverse feed, the strip sensor is activated.)
E: Strip mode (with reverse feed, the strip sensor is ignored,
supporting an applicator.)
e: Print speed
2: 2 ips
4: 4 ips
6: 6 ips
f: Use of ribbon
0: No ribbon
1: Ribbon is used.
2: Ribbon is used.
g: Print orientation and mirror printing
0: Bottom first printing
1: Top first printing
2: Bottom first mirror printing
3: Top first mirror printing
h: Type of status response
0: No status response
1: Status response is returned.

- 139 -
Explanation (1) Number of labels to be issued
c If increment/decrement is not specified, the same data will be printed on the
designated number of labels.
d If increment/decrement is specified, the designated number of labels will be
printed while incrementing/decrementing the designated drawing area one by
one.
* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
(2) Cut interval
The cut interval is valid only when the cutter has been installed and the issue
mode is set to “C”. If an error occurs during an issue after the cut interval is
designated, and then printing is restarted, the printer ejects the printed paper, then
resumes printing from the paper on which the error occurred.
When the automatic forward feed standby function is enabled in the system mode,
the printer automatically performs an approximately 14.0-mm forward feed if no
subsequent command is sent from the PC in 1 second after issuing the last label.
However, if the label pitch length is 20 mm or less, the edge of the label is caught
on the head, when the label is fed backward to the home position. Therefore,
even if the automatic forward feed standby is specified, a forward feed is not
performed.
When receiving the Issue Command during the automatic forward feed standby,
the printer starts issuing the label after feeding it backward to the print start
position.
If any command is sent and processed after the Issue Command is sent, the
automatic forward feed is not performed. Therefore, a command should not be
sent after the Issue Command is sent. Before the automatic forward feed is
performed, the printer should not be turned off then on, or placed in a pause state
and reset. Doing so and pressing the [FEED] key prevents the automatic
forward feed from being performed.
If the paper is fed by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer during the forward
feed standby, the printer feeds one label, cuts, performs the automatic forward
feed, and then stops.
(3) Type of sensor
c No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the
Label Size Set Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the
tag paper is automatically detected by the reflective sensor and the paper
position is finely adjusted for every piece.
e Transmissive sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically detected by
the transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every
piece.

- 140 -
 f Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value):
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically detected by
the transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every
piece according to the value set by the threshold setting operation (key
operation).
g Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
Printing takes place according to the parameters designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the tag
paper is automatically detected by the reflective sensor and the paper position
is finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the threshold
setting operation (key operation).

(4) Issue mode

[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 0, Issue count: 3)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to OFF in the system mode.

Print head position

(1) Idling (at the print start position)

A (2) Prints the 1st label (A).

A B (3) Prints the 2nd label (B).

A B C (4) Prints the 3rd label (C).

[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 0, Issue count: 3)]

• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to ON in the system
mode.

Print head position

(1) Idling (during the forward feed standby)

(2) Reverse feed to the print start position.

A (3) Prints the 1st label (A).

A B (4) Prints the 2nd label (B).

A B C (5) Prints the 3rd label (C).

A B C (6) After 1 second, performs 14.0-mm

automatic forward feed.

- 141 -
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to OFF in the system
mode.
• When the cutter is used:

Cut position Print head position

(1) Idling

A (2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).

A (3) Feeds the 1st label (A) to the cut position.

A (4) Cuts the 1st label (A).

(5) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

B (7) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.

B (8) Cuts the 2nd label (B).

(9) Reverse feed to the print start position.

- 142 -
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to ON in the system
mode.
• When the cutter is used:

Cut position Print head position

(1) Idling (during the forward feed standby)

(2) Reverse feed to the print start position.

A (3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).

A (4) Feeds the 1st label (A) to the cut position.

A (5) Cuts the 1st label (A).

(6) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (7) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

B (8) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.

B (9) Cuts the 2nd label (B).

(10) Reverse feed to the print start position.

(11) After 1 second, performs 14.0-mm

automatic forward feed.

- 143 -
[D: Strip mode (Issue count: 3)]

Strip position Print head position

(1) Idling

(2) Reverse feed to the print start position.

A (3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).

(4) Remove the 1st label (A).

(5) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

(7) Remove the 2nd label (B).

(8) Reverse feed to the print start position.

C (9) Completes printing the 3rd label (C)

* The next label is not printed until the 3rd label

(C) is removed.

- 144 -
[E: Strip mode (Issue mode: E)]
The expansion I/O is installed:
The strip sensor is ignored. An issue is performed by checking a PAUSE
signal of the expansion I/O.
Strip position Print head position

(1) Idling
The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
ON.
(2) The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
OFF.
Reverse feed to the print start position.
A (3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
ON.
(4) Remove the 1st label (A).
The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
OFF.
(5) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
ON.
(7) Remove the 2nd label (B).
The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
OFF.
(8) Reverse feed to the print start position.

C (9) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).

The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned
ON.

* While the PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is on, a

label is not printed.

- 145 -
The expansion I/O is not installed:
The strip sensor is ignored.
Strip position Print head position

(1) Idling

(2) Reverse feed to the print start position.

A (3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).

(4) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (5) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

(6) Reverse feed to the print start position.

C (7) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).

* The next label is printed regardless of whether

the label (C) is removed or not.

*1 This issue mode differs from the issue mode D in the operation that the
next label is issued regardless of whether the label is removed or not.
*2 A peripheral device, such as an applicator, must control the PAUSE signal
of the expansion I/O.
*3 When the issue count is set to 2 or more when the expansion I/O has been
installed, the printer continues to issue the specified number of labels as
long as the PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is off.
*4 When the issue count is set to 2 or more when the expansion I/O has not
been installed, the specified number of labels are issued.

- 146 -
 (5) Print speed
• Printing takes place at the designated speed.
However, the reverse feed speed in cut mode and strip mode is 3 ips. This
can be changed to 2 ips in the system mode.
• The available issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.
Model
Parameter

1
2 2 ips
3
4
4 ips
5
6
7
8 6 ips
9
A

(6) Use of ribbon

No ribbon: Thermal paper is used. (Thermal direct issue mode)
Ribbon is used.: The ribbon is used. (Thermal transfer issue mode)

(7) Print orientation and mirror printing

The origin of coordinates and printing direction vary according to the designation
of print orientation.
c Bottom first printing

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag
Origin of Origin of
coordinates coordinates
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length Sample print length Sample

Effective Effective
print width print width
X X
0 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y Y
[Labels] [Tags]

- 147 -
 d Top first printing

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length print length

Origin of Origin of
Effective coordinates Effective coordinates
print width (0, 0) print width (0, 0)
Y Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 0
X X

[Labels] [Tags]

e Bottom first mirror printing

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag
Origin of Origin of
coordinates coordinates
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective
pitch
print length print length

Effective Effective
print width print width
X X
0 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y Y
[Labels] [Tags]

- 148 -
 f Top first mirror printing

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective
pitch
print length print length

Origin of Origin of
coordinates Effective coordinates Effective
(0, 0) print width (0, 0) print width

Y Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 0
X X
[Labels] [Tags]

(8) Status response

When the option “Status response is returned.” has been selected, a status
response is returned at the end of printing or if an error occurs.
In the batch mode or the cut mode, the print end status response is returned after
the designated number of labels have been printed.
In the strip mode, a status response is returned after one label has been printed.
* Do not change the setting of the status response parameter during printing.
Otherwise the status response may not be returned properly.

- 149 -
Examples

• Issue count: 4 pieces

41.0
• Cut interval: 1 piece
mm • Paper: Tag paper (Reflective
Sample sensor is used.)
76.2 • Issue mode: Cut issue
73.2 mm
mm • Print speed: 4”/sec.
• Ribbon: Use
• Status response: On

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C4101 [LF] [NUL]

- 150 -
Notes ~ Process to stop the label at the home position after a head-open state is detected:
When a gap between labels (or a black mark) is detected during a head open state,
the value is set again to stop each label positioned between the sensor and the print
head at the home position.

Stop position Sensor

A B C

77 mm

92 mm

• The labels are moved on the above condition.

Stop position Sensor

A B C

• Stop position after feeding one label

Stop position Sensor

+15 mm after detection
of gap between B and C

A B C D

* However, an error will result when feed jam conditions are satisfied.
Paper feed direction

- 151 -
6.3.15 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T

Function Feeds the paper.

Format [ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Type of sensor

0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor
3: Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value)
4: Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
b: Cut or non-cut
0: Non-cut
1: Cut
c: Feed mode
C: Batch mode (Cut and feed when “1 (Cut)” is selected for parameter b.)
D: Strip mode (with reverse feed)
E: Strip mode (with reverse feed, the strip sensor is ignored, supporting an
applicator.)
d: Feed speed
2: 2 ips
4: 4 ips
6: 6 ips
e: Use of ribbon
0: No ribbon
1: Ribbon is used.
2: Ribbon is used.

Explanation (1) Type of sensor

c No sensor:
Paper is fed according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Paper is fed according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag
paper is automatically detected by the reflective sensor and the stop position is
finely adjusted.
e Transmissive sensor:
Paper is fed according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically detected by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.

- 152 -
 f Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value):
Paper is fed according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically detected by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted according to the
value set by the threshold set operation (key operation).
g Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
Paper is fed according to the parameters designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the tag paper
is automatically detected by the reflective sensor and the paper position is
finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the threshold set
operation (key operation).
(2) Cut/non-cut
This option is valid in the batch mode only. (Non-cut is automatically selected for
the strip mode.) When the automatic forward feed standby function has been set
to ON in the system mode, the printer automatically performs an approximately
14.0-mm forward feed if no subsequent command is sent from the PC in 1
second.
When the Feed Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the
printer performs a reverse feed to the original position.
* Refer to the section regarding the Issue Command for precautions.
(3) Feed mode
[C: Batch (Non-cut)]

Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

(2) Completes a paper feed.

(Feed to the print start position is completed and
stops.)

[C: Batch (Cut)]

• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to OFF in the system mode.

Cut position Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

(2) Completes a paper feed.

(Feed to the print start position is completed.)
(3) Feeds the paper to the cut position.

(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.

(5) Reverse feed to the print start position.

- 153 -
[C: Batch (Cut)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to ON in the system mode.

Cut position Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

(2) Completes a paper feed.

(Feed to the print start position is completed.)
(3) Feeds the paper to the cut position.

(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.

(5) Reverse feed to the print start position.

(6) After 1 second, performs 14.0-mm automatic

forward feed.

[D: Strip]

Strip position Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

(2) Remove the label on the strip shaft.

(3) Reverse feed to the print start position.

(4) Starts a paper feed.

(5) Completes the paper feed.

(Feed to the print start position is completed and
stopped.)

- 154 -
[E: Strip (Feed mode: E)]
Expansion I/O has been installed:
The strip sensor is ignored. A feed is performed by checking the PAUSE signal of
the expansion I/O.

Strip position Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned ON.

(2) Remove the label.

The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned OFF.

(3) Reverse feed to the print start position.

(4) Completes a paper feed.

(Feed to the print start position is completed and stops.)
The PAUSE signal of the expansion I/O is turned ON.

Expansion I/O is not installed:

The strip sensor is ignored. A feed is performed.

Strip position Print head position

(1) Load the paper.

(2) Reverse feed to the print start position

(3) Feed to the print start position is completed and

stopped.

*1 The feed mode E differs from the feed mode D in the operation that the next
label is fed regardless of whether the label is removed or not.
*2: A peripheral device, such as an applicator, must control the PAUSE signal of
the expansion I/O.

- 155 -
 (4) Feed speed
• A paper feed is performed at the designated speed.
However, the reverse feed speed in the cut mode or the strip mode is 3 ips.
This can be changed to 2 ips in the system mode.
• The available issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.

Model
Parameter

1
2 2 ips
3
4
4 ips
5
6
7
8 6 ips
9
A

(5) Use of ribbon

No ribbon: The ribbon motors are not operated during paper feed.
Ribbon is used.: The ribbon motors are operated during paper feed.

Notes (1) If the label size, type of sensor, feed amount fine adjustment, cut position fine
adjustment (or strip position fine adjustment), or reverse feed amount fine
adjustment is changed, the Feed Command must be sent to adjust the print start
position prior to printing by feeding one label.
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is stored in memory (retained even if the
power is turned off).
(3) When “status response is returned.” has been selected in the Issue Command
parameter setting, a status response is returned after the end of feed or when an
error occurs.
(4) For explanation of the process to stop the label at the print start position, refer to
the section regarding the Issue Command.
(5) When “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to ON in the system mode,
the printer automatically performs 14.0-mm forward feed if no subsequent
command is sent from the PC in 1 second after the last label has been fed.
When the Feed Command is received during the forward feed standby, the printer
feeds the label backward to the print start position.
* Refer to the section regarding the Issue Command for precautions.

- 156 -
Examples

41.0
mm
76.2 mm
73.2 Sample
mm

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C43001 [LF] [NUL]

- 157 -
6.3.16 EJECT COMMAND [ESC] IB

Function Ejects (cuts off) the label remaining between the print head and the cutter, and returns
to the original position.

Format [ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]

Notes When “Automatic forward feed standby” has been set to ON in the system mode, the
printer automatically performs 14.0-mm forward feed if no subsequent command is sent
from the PC in 1 second after an ejection of paper.
When the Eject Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the printer
feeds the label backward to the print start position first, and then ejects it.
* Refer to the section regarding the Issue Command for precautions.

Examples
Cut position Print head position

(1) Idling

A (2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).

A B (3) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).

A B C (4) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).

A B C (5) Feeds the labels to the cut position by

the Eject Command.
A B C (6) Completes cutting labels.

(7) Reverse feed to the print start position.

- 158 -
6.3.17 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND [ESC] U1, [ESC] U2

Function After printing or feeding the paper, feeds the paper to the position where the paper can
be cut manually.
When the next label is to be printed, feeds the paper backward to the print start
position.

Format Forward Feed

[ESC] U1; aaaa [LF] [NUL]
Reverse Feed
[ESC] U2; aaaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Forward/reverse feed amount

0030 to 2000 (in 0.1 mm units)

Notes (1) When the [FEED] key is pressed after the Forward Feed Command has been
transmitted, one label is fed. And then, the printer automatically feeds the labels
by the designated forward feed amount.
(2) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is stored in memory (retained even if the
power is turned off).
(3) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is ignored in the strip mode and the cut
issue mode.
(4) The forward feed is performed at the speed designated by the Issue Command or
Feed Command. The reverse feed is performed at the same speed with the
forward feed. However, it can be changed in the system mode.
(5) A reverse feed may not be performed as specified, depending on the print
conditions. When the media sensor is used and if the label/tag pitch is almost
same as the distance between the print head and the media sensor (74.3 mm), a
label/tag may not be returned to the print start position, even if the same value is
specified for both forward feed and reverse feed. It may result in an error. In
such case, making the reverse feed amount larger than the forward feed amount
can prevent this error.

- 159 -
Examples

Cut position Print head position

(1) Idling

(2) Feeds one label.

(3) Feeds the labels to the position where

the label can be cut manually.
(4) Cut the label manually.

(5) Standby

(6) Reverse feed to the print start position.

A A A (7) Prints three pieces of label A.

A A A (8) Feeds the labels to the position

where labels A can be cut manually.
A A A (9) Cut labels A manually.

(10) Standby

(11) Reverse feed to the print start position.

B (12) Prints one piece of label B.

B (13) Feeds the labels to the position where

label B can be cut manually.
B (14) Cut label B manually.

(15) Standby

[ESC] T20C40 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0003, 0002C4001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C4001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]

- 160 -
6.3.18 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF

Function Allocates the storage area in the flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XF; aa, bb, cc [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area

00 to 24 (0 KB to 3,072 KB) (in units of 128 KB)
bb: Size of bit map writable character storage area
00 to 24 (0 KB to 3,072 KB) (in units of 128 KB)
cc: Size of BASIC file storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 1,792 KB) (in units of 128 KB)
AA: The current BASIC file storage area and contents are retained.

Explanation (1) The total capacity of the storage area in flash ROM is variable. The minimum
capacity is 3,072 KB.
~ In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set in a range of “00” to “14”:
(2) When this command is received, the entire area in flash ROM on the CPU board is
cleared.
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order of precedence – the
TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the
BASIC file storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining
area is used for the PC save area.
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character
storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, is 3,072
KB, the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area,
and the BASIC file storage area are allocated as specified, respectively. In this
case, however, there is no PC save area.
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 3,072
KB, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as specified with the highest
priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit map writable character
storage area. If there is still remaining area after the TrueType font storage area
and the bit map writable character storage area are allocated, it is used for the
BASIC file storage area. There is no PC save area.
(7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the storage
area is not allocated.
(8) When “14” (896 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the entire
storage areas are occupied by that area. For example, if “14” is specified for the
TrueType Font storage area, the entire storage areas are used for the TrueType
Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file
storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.

- 161 -
 ~ In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set to “AA”:
(9) When this command is received, the BASIC file storage area is reserved and the
other areas in flash ROM on the CPU board are cleared.
(10) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
If “AA” is set for the size of the BASIC file storage area with the BASIC file storage
area being unallocated, the BASIC file storage area remains unallocated.
(11) The storage areas except for the BASIC file storage area are allocated in the
following order of precedence – the TrueType font storage area, and the bit map
writable character storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the
remaining area is used for the PC save area.
(12) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, is equal to the size of ‘3,072 KB minus
the BASIC file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area and the bit map
writable character storage area are allocated as specified. In this case, however,
there is no PC save area.
(13) If the sum of TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, exceeds the size of ‘3,072 KB minus the
BASIC file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as
specified with the highest priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit
map writable character storage area. There is no PC save area.
(14) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area and the
bit map writable character storage area, the storage area is not allocated.
(15) If the size of ‘3,072 KB minus the BASIC file storage area size’ or more is specified
for either the TrueType font storage area or the bit map writable character storage
area, each area other than the BASIC file storage area is allocated as specified.
For example, when setting “20” or “21” for the size of the TrueType font storage
area while the BASIC file storage area secures “4” (512KB), the entire storage
areas except the BASIC file storage area are allocated to the TrueType font
storage area. There is no bit map writable character storage area or PC save
area.

Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)

Example The TrueType font storage area and bit map writable character storage area are set to
768 KB and 512 KB, respectively.
(PC save area: 3,072 KB − 768KB − 512 KB = 1,792 KB)
[ESC] XF; 05, 04, 00 [LF] [NUL]

- 162 -
6.3.19 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1

Function Formats (initializes) the flash ROM on the CPU board for storage.

Format [ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Formatting (initializing) range

A: Entire areas of the flash memory
B: PC save area of the flash memory
C: Writable character storage area of the flash memory
b: Drive (Omissible. When omitted, the flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board

Explanation (1) When using a new flash memory, the area to be used must be formatted
(initialized) before the PC interface command or writable characters are stored.
(2) After the flash memory is formatted, the remaining memory capacity is displayed
on the LCD.
(3) When the already stored data (PC interface commands, writable characters, logos)
is stored again, the memory is consumed every time data is stored, unless the
Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted.
(4) When a label issue operation is performed after the Flash Memory Format
Command is sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(5) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued for about 10 seconds, the printer automatically enters the online mode
(label issue operation). At this time, the image buffer is automatically cleared.

Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Example [ESC] J1; A, 0 [LF] [NUL]

- 163 -
6.3.20 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND [ESC] XE

Function Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in the flash ROM
on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XE; a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 ------, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: First character code for each range

2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
bbbb: No. of characters for each range
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)

Explanation (1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be
divided into two or more. As the control information area for the unnecessary
codes can be deleted by designating the character code range, the capacity of
flash memory can be used efficiently.
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0x4000 (16384
characters).
(3) Up to 2700 ranges can be designated.
(4) It is not possible to store the character codes which are not conforming to the
setting for this command.
(5) The first character code for each area should be sent in the ascending order.
The areas must not overlap. If these conditions are not satisfied, the operation is
not guaranteed.

Refer to • Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

Example In case that Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH: Character data is present.
Character data is not present.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
8140
:
81F0
:
8240
:
82F0
:
8340
:
83D0

[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]

- 164 -
6.3.21 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER STORE COMMAND [ESC] XD

Function Stores writable characters and logos in the flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]

Term Sj: Drive in which writable characters or logos are stored

(Omissible. When omitted, the flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
j: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
aa: Writable character types
01 to 40
41 16 × 16 (dots)
42 24 × 24 (dots)
43 32 × 32 (dots)
44 48 × 48 (dots)
51 2-byte code character
b(b): Writable character code
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 44)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character type is 51.)
ccc: Left offset
000 to 719 (in units of dots)
ddd: Top offset
000 to 719 (in units of dots)
eee: Character width
001 to 720 (in units of dots)
fff: Character height
001 to 720 (in units of dots)
ggg: Character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing
000 to 999 (in dots)
h: Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored
* When the writable character type is 41 to 44, left offset, top offset, character width,
character height, and character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing are fixed
to “000”. Any settings are ignored.

- 165 -
Explanation (1) Type of writable character
Up to 44 types of writable character sets can be stored. However, the maximum
number of characters varies depending on the writable character size and number
of characters because of the limited memory capacity. For writable character
types 41 to 44, each writable character size is fixed.
(2) Character code
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character type. The maximum number of
characters are 40 types × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending
on the writable character size and the number of characters because of the limited
memory capacity. A character code of the character types 41 to 44 is stored in 1
byte. However, when it is called up, F0H is added to the upper digit, so a
character code consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters can be
stored per character type.
(3)

Top
offset

Char.
height

Base line

Reference Reference point

point of next char.

Left
offset Char. width

Character-to-character spacing/
proportional spacing

- 166 -
 (4) Writable character types: 01 to 40, 51 to 55
Char. width 26 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 3FH 5 3CH 6 30H 7 30H 8 30H
9 3FH 10 3CH 11 37H •
•
•
•
Char. •
height •
31 dots • 240 30H
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 0FH 3 C0H 4 00H
5 FCH 6 7FH
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
•
8 8 8 8 •
•
•
•
• 120 00H
121 FFH 122 FCH 123 00H 124 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 248). (The upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 124).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

- 167 -
Notes
(1) Different character width and character height can be designated for the same writable
character type, according to the writable character codes. In other words, character size
can be changed by each character, thus memory can be saved.
(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the
parameters of character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top
offset.
(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinate is positioned at the upper left when
drawing because the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)

(5) Writable character type: 41 (16 dots ×16 dots )

Character width 16 dots Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H
5 30H 6 31H 7 38H
•
Character
•
height
16 dots •
58 31H 59 38H 60 30H
61 30H 62 30H 63 30H 64 30H

4 4 4 4 Hex. mode
8 8 1 00H 2 00H 3 01H 4 80H
5 01H 6 80H 7 01H
•
•
•
26 80H 27 01H 28 80H
29 01H 30 80H 31 00H 32 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 64). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 64 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 32).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 32 bytes.
* When writable character type 41 is designated, the width and height of the character are
both 16 dots.

- 168 -
(6) Writable character type: 42 (24 dots ×24 dots )

Character width 24 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H 9 33H
•
Character •
height •
24 dots •
• 137 30H 138 30H
139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 00H 3 00H
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 00H 5 3CH 6 00H
•
8 8 8
•
•
•
67 00H 68 3CH 69 00H
70 00H 71 00H 72 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 144). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 144 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 72).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 72 bytes.
* When writable character type 42 is designated, the width and height of the character are
both 24 dots.

- 169 -
 (7) Writable character type: 43 (32 dots ×32 dots)

Character width 32 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H 7 30H
8 30H 9 30H 10 30H 11 30H 12 37H
•
•
•
•
Character • 248 30H 249 30H
height
250 30H 251 30H 252 30H 253 30H 254 30H 255 30H 256 30H
32 dots

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 00H 3 C0H 4 00H
5 00H 6 07H 7 C0H
•
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 •
8 8 8 8 123 C0H 124 00H
125 00H 126 00H 127 00H 128 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 256). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 256 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 128).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 128 bytes.
* When writable character type 43 is designated, the width and height of the character are
both 32 dots.

- 170 -
 (8) Writable character type: 44 (48 dots ×48 dots)

Character width 48 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H 9 30H 10 30H
•
•
•
•
• 569 30H 570 30H
571 30H 572 30H 573 30H 574 30H 575 30H 576 30H
Character
height
48 dots
Nibble mode
1 00H 2 00H 3 00H 4 00H 5 00H 6 00H
7 00H 8 00H 9 07H 10 E0H
•
•
•
•
• 281 00H 282 00H
283 00H 284 00H 285 00H 286 00H 287 00H 288 00H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8 8 8 8 8 8

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 576). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 576 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 288).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 288 bytes.
* When writable character type 44 is designated, the width and height of the character are
both 48 dots.

- 171 -
 Notes (1) No matter what character type or character code is selected, no memory will be
wasted.
(2) When a new writable character is stored, the Flash Memory Format Command
([ESC] J1) must be transmitted.
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in the flash memory again by
sending the Bit Map Writable Character Store Command ([ESC] XD, but memory
will be consumed each time the code is stored. The memory can be efficiently
used if the Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) is sent in advance.
(4) If the flash memory is used, and a label issue operation is performed after sending
the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD), the image buffer is cleared
automatically.
(5) When further storing operation is not continued for about 10 seconds after storing
the writable character and logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode
(label issue operation). In this case, when the flash memory was used, the
image buffer will be cleared automatically.
Refer to Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

- 172 -
Examples Writable character type: 03
Writable character code: 70H

Top
offset
22 dots

Char.
height
31 dots
Base line

Reference Reference
point point of next
char.

Left offset
Char. width 26 dots
2 dots
Character-to-character spacing/proportional
spacing: 30 dots

[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>
0001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]

* 30H = ”0”
31H = ”1”
32H = ”2”
33H = ”3”
34H = ”4”
35H = ”5”
36H = ”6”
37H = ”7”
38H = ”8”
39H = ”9”
3AH = ”:”
3BH = ”;”
3CH = ”<”
3DH = ”=”
3EH = ”>”
3FH = ”?”

- 173 -
6.3.22 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG

Function Draws graphic data.

Format [ESC] SG; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
or
[ESC] SG0; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, ffff, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa(D): X-coordinate of the print origin for drawing graphic data
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4-digit value, the coordinate is specified in dots.
0000D or greater
bbbb(D): Y-coordinate of the print origin for drawing graphic data
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4- or 5-digit value, the coordinate is specified in
dots.
0000D or greater
cccc: No. of graphic width dots
Fixed as 4 digits (in units of dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
dddd: No. of graphic height dots
4 or 5 digits (in units of dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:
Resolution of graphic data: *only two types
0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.)
0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.)
e: Type of graphic data
When the command starts with “[ESC] SG;”:
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
2: BMP file mode Overwrite drawing
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) OR drawing
6: PCX file mode Overwrite drawing
7: TOPIX compression mode XOR drawing
When the command starts with “[ESC] SG0;”:
A: Printer driver compression mode Overwrite drawing

- 174 -
 ffff: Data count (Effective only for the command starting with “[ESC] SG0;”)
Fixed as 4 digits
Represents the total number of bytes for the compressed graphic data by
32-bit hex. code.
Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295 bytes
(00H, 00H, 00H, 00H to FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH)
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data

Explanation (1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “6”, or “A” is selected, the graphic data is
drawn by overwriting the image buffer.
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying
out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates

Graphic
Effective Effective height dots
print length print length
Graphic
height dots
Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
Graphic width Graphic width coordinates
dots dots (0, 0)

Effective Effective
print width print width
X Y
0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Print direction: Bottom first] [Print direction: Top first]

- 175 -
Print origin of
coordinates Graphic width 19 dots
Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 33H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H •
•
•
•
•
Graphic •
height •
22 dots • 126 30H
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 30H 3 00H
4 00H 5 38H
•
•
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 •
63 00H
8 8 8 64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in above-
mentioned order (1 → 132). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in above-
mentioned order (1 → 66).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

- 176 -
[When TOPIX compression mode is selected]

Range for length

First line Second line

Graphic data Length L1 L1

L2

L3

(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )

Example. Length = 20 bytes: 00 14

(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L1
0: Not present
1: Present

512 dots 512 dots 512 dots

(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained
(of the L1 large block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L2
0: Not present
1: Present

64 dots 64 dots 64 dots

(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of
the L2 medium block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L3
0: Not present
1: Present

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1).
The alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).

* The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer
size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the
graphic width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte).

- 177 -
[When the printer driver compression mode is selected]

(1) For the command starting with ”[ESC] SG0;”, only “A: Printer driver compression mode” can
be selected for the type of graphic data. The parameter for the data count is attached after
the parameter for the type of graphic data. When the total number of data cannot be
provided by the printer driver, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H” should be specified for the number of
graphic data. However, in this case, the printer diver cannot support printing through a
serial interface (RS-232C).
(2) How to compress data
Compression is performed for every data of one line specified for the number of graphic
width dots.
The data is made up in units of 8 dots. A repeated value is encoded in 2 bytes. The first
byte is a numeric value “n” indicating that a value is repeated (-n + 1) times.
The range is between -127 and -1. The second byte is the repeated value.
If a value is not repeated, the first byte is the numeric value “m”. The length of the values is
indicated by (m+1). The range of “m” is between 0 and 126. The length of the repetition
of the value “n” should not exceed 127, and ”m” should not exceed 126, respectively.
If it exceeds the specified value, it should be divided into blocks of repetition.
When a line of the same contents appears repeatedly, the number of such lines is encoded
in 2 bytes. The first byte is fixed as 127. The second byte indicates “N” times that the line
of the same contents is repeated. Its range is between 1 and 255. “N” should not exceed
255. If it exceeds 255, one-line data should be newly compressed, and the remaining
number of repetitions should be encoded.
[Example]
Data before being compressed (Width: 120 dots, Height: 300 lines)
Line No. Graphic data

1 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
2 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh

299 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
300 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh

- 178 -
Data after being compressed
Line No. Graphic data

1 FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh

2 to 256 7FH FFH
257 FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh
258 to 300 7FH 2BH
FEh = -2
-(-2) + 1 = 3
FFh is repeated 3 times.
03h = 3
3+1=4
4-byte data (BBh CCh DDh EEh) without
repetition
FAh = -6
-(-6) + 1 = 7
AAh is repeated 7 times.

- 179 -
Notes (1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the
graphic data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set
Command ([ESC] D).
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must
also be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective
print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as
the above.
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm in case of the 203 dpi-print head model, and
11.8 dots/mm in case of the 300 dpi-print head model, respectively.
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.5 mm in case of the 203 dpi-
print head model, and ±0.33 mm in case of the 300 dpi-print head model,
respectively, in the X direction with respect to the designated print origin of the X-
coordinate.
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly
developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with
respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4
bits occurs.

[Effective print area] [mm]

203 dpi print head 300 dpi print head
Model
Issue mode
Batch Strip Cut Batch Strip Cut
Item
Print head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print head width 104.0 mm 105.7 mm
Min. 10.0 10.0
G: Effective print width
Max. 104.0 105.7
H: Effective Min. 6.0 21.4 11.0 6.0 21.4 11.0
Label
print length Max. 995.0 991.0 995.0 991.0
Min. 8.0 --- 11.0 8.0 --- 11.0
Tag
Max. 997.0 --- 997.0 997.0 --- 997.0

- 180 -
Examples
10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??
>000??>0007? <0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = “0” 38H = “8”
31H = “1” 39H = “9”
32H = “2” 3AH = “:”
33H = “3” 3BH = “;”
34H = “4” 3CH = “<”
35H = “5” 3DH = “=”
36H = “6” 3EH = “>”
37H = “7” 3FH = “?”

- 181 -
[TOPIX compression mode]
10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30

Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09
(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line)
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20
(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line)
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line) (13th line)
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)

- 182 -
6.3.23 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO

Function Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.

(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in the flash
memory.)

Format [ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number to be used for saving in flash memory or calling
01 to 99
Sb: Drive in which the PC interface command is stored
(Omissible. If omitted, the flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
c: Status response at save time
0: No status response
1: Status response is returned.

Notes (1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the
following will be saved into flash memory without being analyzed.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ, [ESC] XT)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD, [ESC] XA)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
(2) No error check is made for the commands when saving them.
(3) Up to 64 KB can be saved per save.

Refer to • Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

Examples [ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

- 183 -
6.3.24 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP

Function Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.

Format [ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Note If the storing operation is not continued for about 10 seconds after the PC interface
command is stored, the printer enters the online mode (label issue operation). In this
case, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.

Refer to Save Start Command ([ESC] XO, [ESC] XV)

- 184 -
6.3.25 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND [ESC] XQ

Function Calls PC interface commands saved in flash memory.

Format [ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number of the file to be called from the flash memory
01 to 99
Sb: Drive from which the command is called
(Omissible. When omitted, the flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
c: Status response when the data is called up
0: No status response
1: Status response is returned.
d: Automatic call at power on time
L: Automatic call
M: No automatic call

Notes (1) If the relevant save identification number is not found, an error will result.
(2) If no save identification number is found at power on time when the automatic call
has been specified, the setting of the automatic call will change to ‘No automatic
call’, causing no error.
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command that was called by the
Saved Data Call Command or the automatic call at power on time, a command
error will result. After an error has occurred, the power must be turned off.
When the power is turned on again, the setting for the automatic call at power on
time changes to ‘No automatic call’.
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data
Call Command is sent after the Save Terminate Command.

Refer to • Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)

• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Examples [ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 185 -
6.3.26 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND [ESC] HD

Function Checks the thermal head for broken elements.

Format [ESC] HD001 (, a) [LF] [NUL]...... The all thermal elements are checked.
[ESC] HD003, s1s1s1s1, e1e1e1e1, s2s2s2s2, e2e2e2e2,--- s8s8s8s8, e8e8e8e8 (, a) [LF] [NUL]
............................................. The thermal elements are partially checked.

Term a: Check result status response (Omissible)

A: Status is returned.
(When omitted, the check result status is not returned.)
s1s1s1s1 --- s8s8s8s8: Area start coordinate Fixed as 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
e1e1e1e1 --- e8e8e8e8: Area end coordinate Fixed as 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)

Explanation (1) The Head Broken Dots Check Command is subject to batch processing. If the
Label Issue Command to issue 100 labels is transmitted before the Head Broken
Dots Check Command, the head broken dots check will be executed after 100 labels
have been issued.
(2) In case of the all thermal elements check, the all thermal elements of the thermal
head will be checked.
(3) When the check result is found to be normal under the condition that the check
result status is not returned, the next command is processed. If the check result is
found to be abnormal, an error occurs. Whether or not the status is returned when
an error occurs depends on the Issue Command setting.
When the check result is found to be normal under condition that the check result
status is returned, a status indicating the normal end of the head broken elements
check is sent. After that, the next command is processed. If the check result is
found to be abnormal, a status indicating the head broken elements error is sent,
and then the printer stops.
Status for normal end
[SOH] [STX] “0020000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
Status for head broken elements error
[SOH] [STX] “1720000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
(4) The all thermal elements check takes approximately 1 second.
(5) Partial thermal elements check:
• Up to 8 areas can be designated. If the number of designated areas is less than
8, the rest is omissible.
• When the value set for the start coordinate is larger than the value set for the end
coordinate, the end coordinate is handled as the start coordinate, and the start
coordinate is handled as the end coordinate.
• Areas can overlap each other.
• Even if a coordinate is specified beyond the print head width, it will be regarded
as the maximum value, therefore, a command error does not occur.

Examples [ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] HD001 [LF] [NUL]

- 186 -
6.3.27 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND [ESC] XJ

Function Displays the message on the upper line of the LCD.

Format [ESC] XJ; aaa ------ aaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa ------ aaa: Display data (16 digits)

Explanation When the printer receives the Message Display Command, first it processes the already
received data (or completes the label issue if the Issue Command has been sent).
Then, it displays the message on the upper line of the LCD, and finally it enters a pause
state.
When the [RESTART] key is pressed, the pause state is cleared and the LCD displays
the normal message. After the pause state is cleared, the printer resumes processing
the data received after the Message Display Command.

Notes (1) The number of characters to be displayed is 16. When the display data is less
than 16 characters, the blanks are filled with spaces. When the display data
exceeds 16 characters, the excess data is discarded.
(2) During a pause state, a halt due to an error, or a head open state, the Message
Display Command is not processed even if it is received. In this case, the
command is processed after the above state is cleared.
(3) The following characters can be displayed on the LCD.
If a character other than the following is received, “?” is displayed or a command
error results.

2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D
0 SP 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n →
F / ? O _ o ←
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

- 187 -
Examples c Load the paper.
d One piece of paper is fed.
e 4 pieces are issued.

41.0
mm
Sample 76.2
73.2 mm
mm

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

f Message, “Please set [Tag]”, is displayed.

g Change the paper.
h Press the [RESTART] key.
i One piece of paper is fed.
j 2 pieces are issued.

10.0
mm

60.0
57.0 mm
mm

20.0 mm

50.0 mm

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C4001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XJ; Please set [Tag] [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0600, 0500, 0570 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0100, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0011C4001 [LF] [NUL]

- 188 -
6.3.28 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

Explanation The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on. When the
printer receives this command during printing, it returns to its initial state after issuing
the label which is being printed. The next command must not be sent while the printer
is performing initial processing.

Notes (1) In the system mode, any commands except the Reset Command cannot be
processed.
(2) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in the system mode.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the
Graphic Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specifying the type of data.

Example [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

- 189 -
6.3.29 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS

Function Sends the printer status to the host computer.

Format [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

Explanation This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of the status
response parameter. The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and
indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print
count of the batch currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch
waiting to be printed is transmitted.

Notes (1) This command is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and
socket communications. However, in case of the Centronics interface, the printer
returns a status to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately after this command is
received.
(2) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specifying the type of data.
(4) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-
msec. delay until the printer sends a status.
(5) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the
Status Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted
within 20 msec., the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

- 190 -
6.3.30 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.

Format [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of
the receive buffer, regardless of the setting of the Status Response parameter.
The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest
status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch
currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be
printed is transmitted. Free space of the receive buffer for the interface which
sent this command, is returned to the host.

Notes (1) This command is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and
socket communications. However, in case of the Centronics interface, the printer
returns a status to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately after this command is
received.
(2) The printer returns the status only for the interface which sent this command.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specifying the type of data.
(4) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-
msec. delay until the printer sends the status.
(5) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the
Status Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted
within 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

- 191 -
6.3.31 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV

Function Sends information such as the program version of the printer.

Format [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The format of the program version data (27-byte data in total) to be returned to the
host is as follows.

SOH 01H
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“1” 31H
“N” 48H
“O” 49H
Creation date “V” 56H Creation date of the program:
“2” 32H 9-byte data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“2” 32H
“B” 42H
“-“ 2DH
“4” 34H
Model “8” 38H Model:
“0” 30H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“SP” 20H
SP 20H
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5-byte data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

ETX 03H Version

EOT 04H
CR 0DH
LF 0AH

(2) This command is processed in order of receipt. This command is not processed
until the processing of the commands sent prior to this command is completed.
Therefore, if this command is sent while the printer is in the state other than idle,
the program version data may not be returned immediately.

Notes (1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).

- 192 -
6.3.32 PRINTER OPTION STATUS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WN

Function Sends the information what optional devices are installed, to the host.

Format [ESC] WN [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:

SOH STX “E” Option status ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 45H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Reserved A, B, and C
Internal serial port
30H: Not installed.
31H: RFID module (H1)
32H: RFID module (U1)
Cutter
30H: Not installed.
31H: Installed.
USB board
31H: Installed (Fixed)
100Base LAN board
31H: Installed (Fixed)
PCMCIA Slot2
30H: Not installed. (Fixed)
PCMCIA Slot1
30H: Not installed. (Fixed)

- 193 -
6.3.33 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND [ESC] IP

Function Sets the IP address to be required for the network connection.

Format [ESC] IP; a, bbb, ccc, ddd, eee [LF] [NUL]

Term a: IP address to be set

2: Printer IP address (Initial value: 192.168.10.20)
3: Gateway IP address (Initial value: 0.0.0.0)
4: Subnet mask (Initial value: 255.255.255.0)
bbb: First 8 bits: 000 to 255
ccc: Second 8 bits: 000 to 255
ddd: Third 8 bits: 000 to 255
eee: Last 8 bits: 000 to 255

Explanation The IP address setting can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was
last made takes effect.

Example To set the printer IP address to “157.69.9.78”.

[ESC] IP; 2, 157, 069, 009, 078 [LF] [NUL]

- 194 -
6.3.34 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND [ESC] IS

Function Enables or disables the socket communication, and sets the communication port
number to be used.

Format [ESC] IS; a, bbbbb [LF] [NUL]

Term a: 0: Socket communication is disabled.

1: Socket communication is enabled.
bbbbb: Port number (It must be set in 5 digits.)
00000 to 65535

Explanation These settings can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was last
made takes effect.

Example To enable the socket communication and set the port number to “8000”.
[ESC] IS; 1, 08000 [LF] [NUL]

- 195 -
6.3.35 DHCP FUNCTION SET COMMAND [ESC] IH

Function Enables or disables the DHCP function, and sets the DHCP client ID.

Format [ESC] IH; a, bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb [LF] [NUL]

Term a: 0: DHCP function is disabled.

1: DHCP function is enabled.
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb: DHCP client ID
(16-byte data is described in 32-byte
hexadecimal.)

Explanation • These settings can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was last
made takes effect.
• “FFH” in the client ID is assumed as a terminator. Therefore, “FFH” must not be
used in data.
• If “FFH” is specified as the first byte of the DHCP client ID, the printer assumes the
DHCP client ID has not been specified. So the printer uses the MAC address of the
LAN board installed on the printer as the DHCP client ID instead.

Example To enable the DHCP function and set the DHCP client ID to “12H56HCDH”.
[ESC] IH; 1, 1256CDFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF [LF] [NUL]

- 196 -
6.3.36 PASS-THROUGH COMMAND [ESC] @002

Function Passes the serial interface data through the internal serial interface (CN14).

Format [ESC] @002; aaa, bbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Number of bytes to be passed through

001 to 999
bbb --- bbb: Binary data to be passed through

Explanation This command is used to make a serial communication with the RF-ID module. The
number of bytes of data specified by this command is output to the internal serial
interface (CN6: RF-ID) without being processed. Data received from the internal serial
interface (CN6: RF-ID) is output to the serial interface.

- 197 -
6.3.37 INTERNAL SERIAL INTERFACE PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] IZ

Function Sets communication parameters for the internal serial interface.

Format [ESC] IZ; a, b, c, d [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Communication speed

0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
b: Data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
c: Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
d: Parity
0: None
1: Even
2: Odd

Explanation The settings by this command take effect immediately after this command has been
analyzed. (A restart of the printer is not required.) This command is stored into
memory and is retained even if the power is turned OFF.
When a communication error occurs on the internal serial interface, the ON LINE LED
goes off and the ERROR LED goes ON. Message, “INTERNAL COM ERR”, is
displayed on the upper line of the LCD, and then the printer stops due to an error.

Example To set the communication speed, the data length, the stop bit length, and the parity to
9600 bps, 8 bits, 1 bit, and even parity, respectively.
[ESC] IZ; 2, 1, 0, 1 [LF] [NUL]

- 198 -
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] Z2; 1

Function Sets each parameter on the printer.

Format [ESC] Z2; 1, abcdefghijkklmnooppqqrstuuvwxyzABCDEFGH [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Character code selection

0: PC-850
1: PC-852
2: PC-857
3: PC-8
4: PC-851
5: PC-855
6: PC-1250
7: PC-1251
8: PC-1252
9: PC-1253
A: PC-1254
B: PC-1257
C: LATIN9
D: Arabic
b: Character “0” selection
0: 0 (without slash)
1: 0 (with slash)
c: RS-232C communication speed
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
5: 115200 bps
d: RS-232C data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
e: Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
f: RS-232C parity check
0: NONE
1: EVEN
2: ODD

- 199 -
g: RS-232C flow control
0: XON/XOFF protocol
(XON is not output at a power on time, and XOFF is not output at a power
off time.)
1: READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol
(XON is not output at a power on time, and XOFF is not output at a power
off time.)
2: XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON is output at a power on time, and XOFF is output at a power off
time.)
3: XON/XOFF protocol:
(XON is output at a power on time, and XOFF is output at a power off
time.)
4: RTS protocol
(XON is not output at a power on time, and XOFF is not output at a power
off time.)
h: Language for LCD messages
0: ENGLISH
1: GERMAN
2: FRENCH
3: DUTCH
4: SPANISH
5: JAPANESE
6: ITALIAN
i: Automatic forward feed standby after an issue
0: OFF (Not performed)
1: ON (Performed)
j: Forward feed stanby fine adjustment direction
+: Increases the amount of the forward feed
−: Decrease the amount of the forward feed
kk: Fine adjustment value for the forward feed standby
00 to 50 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm) (*1)
l: Head-up operation in the cut issue mode, or the use of the rewinder in the batch
issue mode.
0 or 1: Setting is ignored.
m: Ribbon saving function
0 to 2: Setting is ignored.
n: Type of control code
0: Automatic selection
1: ESC, LF, NUL mode
2: {, |, } mode
3: Any set code mode
oo: 1st byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2-byte ASCII code.) (*3)
pp: 2nd byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2-byte ASCII code.) (*3)

- 200 -
qq: 3rd byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2-byte ASCII code.) (*3)
r: Strip wait status selection
0: OFF (No selection)
1: ON (with selection)
s: [FEED] key function
0: FEED: Feeds one label.
1: PRINT: Prints data of the image buffer on one label.
t: Kanji code selection
0: TYPE1
1: TYPE2
uu: Euro code setting
“20” to “FF” (Specify the hexadecimal code in 2-byte ASCII code) (*3)
v: Automatic head broken dots check
0: OFF (An automatic broken dots check is not performed when the power is
turned on.)
1: ON (An automatic broken dots check is performed when the power is
turned on.)
w: Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
0: TYPE1
1: TYPE2
x: Web printer function setting
0: OFF (Web printer function is disabled.)
1: ON (Web printer function is enabled.)
y: Reset process when the nInit signal is ON
0: OFF (Reset process is not performed.)
1: ON (Reset process is performed.)
z: Ribbon near end detection setting
0: Not detected.
1: Detected when the remaining length of the ribbon is 30 m.
2: Detected when the remaining length of the ribbon is 70 m.
A: Expansion I/O operation mode setting
0: Standard mode
1: In-line mode
B: Centronics operation mode setting
0: SPP (Compatibility mode)
1: ECP (ECP mode)
C: Plug-and-play operation mode setting
0: OFF (Plug-and-play operation is disabled.)
1: ON (Plug-and-play operation is enabled.)
D: Label end/ribbon end process setting
0: TYPE1 (When the label end state is detected, the printer stops even if it is
printing a label.)
1: TYPE2 (When the label end state is detected, the printer stops after it
completes printing a label.)

- 201 -
 E: Pre-strip process setting
0: OFF (The pre-strip process is not performed.)
1: ON (The pre-strip process is performed.)
F: Reverse feed speed setting
0: 3 ips
1: 2 ips
G: Installed solenoid type setting
0 or 1: Setting is ignored.
H: MaxiCode specification setting
0: TYPE1 (Compatible with the current version)
1: TYPE2 (Special specification)
I: Forward feed standby action
0 or 1: Setting is ignored.

Explanation (1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.

*1: Though the values can be set in units of 0.1 mm, those actually set on the printer is
0.5-mm unit. When a value ranging from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it will be
actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value ranging from 0.5 mm to
0.9 mm is set, it will be actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm. This fine adjustment
value is set only when parameter “i” (Forward feed standby after an issue) is set to
“1” (Performed). If it is set to “0” (Not performed), this value is discarded.
*2 This fine adjustment value is set only when parameter “n” (Type of the control
code) is set to “3” (Any set code mode). If it is set to any value other than “3”, this
value is discarded.
*3 The hexadecimal codes are set in 2-byte ASCII code as shown below:
Example 1: To set 36H: ”36” (33H, 36H)
Example 2: To set 42H: ”42” (34H, 32H)
Example 3: To set FFH: ”FF” (46H, 46H)

- 202 -
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] Z2; 2

Function Sets various fine adjustment values on the printer.

Format [ESC] Z2; 2, abbbcdddeffghhhijjkllmnnoppqqrr [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a feed amount fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
−: Forward
bbb: Feed amount fine adjustment value
(*1)
000 to 500 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
c: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position (or strip
position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
−: Forward
ddd: Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position)
000 to 500 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm) (*1)
e: Indicates whether the reverse feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
−: Decrease
ff: Reverse feed amount fine adjustment value
(*1)
00 to 95 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
g: Indicates the direction, left or right, in which the X-coordinate fine adjustment is to
be made.
+: Positive direction (Right)
−: Negative direction (Left)
hhh: X-coordinate fine adjustment value
(*1)
000 to 995 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
i: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the thermal transfer print
mode.
+: Increase (darker)
−: Decrease (lighter)
jj: Print density fine adjustment value (for the thermal transfer print mode)
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
k: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the direct thermal print
mode.
+: Increase (darker)
−: Decrease (lighter)
ll: Print density fine adjustment value (for the direct thermal print mode)
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
m: Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon take-up motor voltage
−: Fixed as Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
nn: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon take-up motor voltage
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)

- 203 -
 o: Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon feed motor voltage
−: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
pp: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon feed motor voltage
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
qq: Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
00 to 40 (in units of 0.1 V)
rr: Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
00 to 40 (in units of 0.1 V)

Explanation (1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.

*1: Though the value can be set in units of 0.1 mm, those actually set on the printer is
0.5-mm unit. When a value ranging from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it will be
actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value ranging from 0.5 mm to
0.9 mm is set, it will be actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm.

- 204 -
6.4.3 RFID PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] Z2; 3

Function Sets RFID-related parameters on the printer.

Format [ESC] Z2; 3, abcccdddeefffgghii [LF] [NUL]

Term a: RFID module type selection

0: Not installed.
1: H1 (B-9704-RFID-H1-QM)
2: U1 (B-9704-RFID-U1-US/EU)
b: RFID error tag detection
0: Not detected.
1: Detected.
ccc: Maximu number of RFID issue retries
000 to 255
ddd: Maximum number of RFID read retries
000 to 255
ee: RFID read retry time-out
00 to 99 (In units of 0.1 sec.: 0.0 sec. to 9.9 sec.)
fff: Maximum number of RFID write retries
000 to 255
gg: RFID write retry time-out
00 to 99 (In units of 0.1 sec.: 0.0 sec. to 9.9 sec.)
h: Feed direction of adjustment for retry
+: Forward
−: Backward
ii: Feed amount of adjustment for retry
00 to 99 (In units of 1 mm: 0 mm to 99 mm)
Only the value of −3 mm or less, or +3 mm or more becomes effective.
Explanation (1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.

- 205 -
6.4.4 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 (zero)

Function Resets the printer.

Format [ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]

Explanation • This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
• Some values in the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) and the Fine Adjustment
Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2), will take effect when the printer is initialized. This
command should be sent after the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) or Fine
Adjustment Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2) is sent.

- 206 -
6.5 EXPLANATION OF THE RFID RELATED COMMANDS
6.5.1 RFID TAG POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMMAND [ESC] @003

Function Sets the feed amount to adjust the RFID tag position before writing data onto it.
If the RFID tag is not positioned just above the RFID antenna when the paper is at the
print start position, the printer automatically feeds the paper forward or backward by the
specified amount to write data onto the RFID tag prior to printing. After that, the printer
returns the paper to the print start position for printing.
Only the value of −30 or less, or +30 or more becomes effective.

Format { @003; abbb | }

Term a: Feed direction

+: Forward
−: Backward
bbbb: Feed amount
0000 to 9999 (In units of 0.1 mm)

- 207 -
6.5.2 RFID TAG READ COMMAND [ESC] WF

Function Reads the data stored on the RFID tag.

Format [ESC] WF (; Naaaa) (, Abbb) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Number of bytes to be read (Omissible)

0001 to 9999
bbb: Address of data to be read
000 to 999
Specify the address where reading the RFID tag is started.
This parameter is effective for the ISO18000-6B tag only.
When omitted, the value will be set to 18.
Explanation (1) When the number of bytes to be read is specified, data of specified bytes is
returned regardless of the type of tag. If the volume of the read data is less than
specified number of bytes, it is filled with [NUL] when returned. If the volume of
the read data is exceeding the specified number of bytes, the excess data is not
returned.
(2) When the number of bytes to be read is omitted, the data will be returned in
accordance with the tag types, as shown in the table below.
Tag type Number of bytes returned
EPC Class 0 8 bytes
EPC Class 1 8 bytes
Tag-it 32 bytes
I-Code 44 bytes
Others 32 bytes

(3) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows.

SOH 01H
Header of the status block
STX 02H
“F” 46H
30H30H: Reading failed.
31H31H: I-Code
30H
31H32H: Tag-it
31H33H: C220
Tag 31H34H: ISO15693
type 31H35H: C210
31H36H: C240
30H 32H31H: EPC Class 0
32H32H: EPC Class 1
32H33H: ISO18000-6B
Data Tag data (0 byte to 9999 bytes)
ETX 03H
EOT 04H
Footer of the status block
CR ODH
LF OAH

- 208 -
Example Examples of the status to be returned are shown below.

[When a reading failed.]

Header “F” Tag type Footer

01H 02H 46H 30H 30H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Reading has failed.

[When a reading succeeded.]

Header “F” Tag type Read data Footer

01H 02H 46H 32H 32H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Read data
“ABCDEFGH”
Tag type: EPC Class 1

- 209 -
6.5.3 RFID VOID PATTERN PRINT COMMAND [ESC] @006

Function Prints the void pattern to indicate an RFID tag error.

Format [ESC] @006 [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The void pattern is printed according to the currently set label size.
After the void pattern is printed, the print data image is still retained.
This void pattern is printed when data cannot be written onto the RIFD tag properly
due to breakage of RFID chip or some other reasons. The void pattern visually
indicates that the RFID tag is faulty.
Usually, the void pattern is automatically printed if writing data onto the RFID tag
results in an error. Therefore, this command does not need to be transmitted.
This command is intended to be used if writing data onto the RFID tag failed while
the BASIC interpreter or the Pass Through Command is used and the RFID
module is manually controlled to issue RFID labels.

- 210 -
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION
(1) Automatic Selection
This printer automatically selects [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H) or {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH)
as an interface command control code. After the power is turned on, the program checks the data
from the host for [ESC] and { and assumes the code whichever has been sent first to be a control
code.
For example, if [ESC] is sent first after the power is turned on, [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL] becomes a
control code, and if “{“ is sent first, { | } becomes a control code. Control code selection is made
for every command. If the control code of the first command is [ESC] ~ [LF] [NUL], followed by
[ESC], the control code becomes [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL]. In the same way, if the first command is
followed by “{“, the control code for the next command becomes { | }. When { | } is the control
code, the data of 00H to 1FH between “{“ and “| }” is ignored. However, the data of 00H to 1FH
becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or the Bit Map Writable Character
Command in hexadecimal mode. When { | } is the control code, { | } cannot be used in the data of
the Data Command or the Message Display Command.

Power ON

Read received data

No
<Is the code ESC?>
No
Yes <Is the code { ?>
Yes
Control code is assumed Control code is The read data is
to be ESC. LF. NUL. assumed to be { | }. discarded.

Command processing

(2) Manual Selection (ESC. LF. NUL)

The control code of the command is [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H), and the control code
selection is not performed.

(3) Manual Selection ({ | })

The control code of the command is {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH), and the control code selection is not
performed. Data of 00H to 1FH is ignored and discarded in this mode. However, data of 00H to
1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or the Bit Map Writable Character
Command in hexadecimal mode. When { | } is used as the control code, { | } cannot be used in
the data of the Data Command or the Message Display Command.

(4) Manual Selection (Any set code)

The control code of the command is the code set in the system mode, and the control code
selection is not performed. The code used in each command should not be set as the control
code.
In the Data Command or the Message Display Command, the code set as the control code cannot
be used.

- 211 -
8. ERROR PROCESSING
If the printer detects any of the following errors, it indicates the error message (LCD, LED), returns
status response (serial interface, parallel interface), and stops its operation.

8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS

(1) Command Errors
An error results if a command length error, command transmission sequence error, command
format error, or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the command. An error also
results if the Format Command of a field is not transmitted and its Data Command is transmitted.
An attempt to call a PC Save Command of an unsaved save identifier results in an error. An
undefined command is not detected as an error, and data is discarded until [ESC] or [{] is
received.
(2) Hardware Errors
A hardware error results if a framing error or parity error is found when receiving data through the
serial interface (RS-232C).
* At the moment when a command error or hardware error occurs, the printer shows the error
message and returns a status response before it stops. Any commands except the Status
Request Command and Reset Command are not processed. When the printer is restored by
the [RESTART] key, the printer enters the initial state which is obtained after the power is
turned on.

8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING

(1) Paper Jam
When the relation between the programmed label (or tag) pitch (A) and the label (or tag) pitch
detected by the sensor (B) is not applicable to the following formula, an error will result:
(A) × 50% ≤ (B) ≤ (A) × 150%
• A paper jam has occurred during paper feed.
• The paper has not been placed properly.
• The label used does not match the type of the sensor.
• The reflective sensor position is not aligned with the black mark.
• The actual label size does not meet the designated label length.
• Label-to-label gap cannot be detected due to a preprint.
• The sensor has not been properly adjusted.
(The sensor has not been adjusted using the label to be used.)
If the stripped label is not detected by the strip sensor when printing or feeding is completed in
the strip mode, an error will result.

- 212 -
(2) Cutter Error
If the status of the cutter home position sensor has not changed for 1.5 sec. or more since the
cutter motor was driven, an error will result.
• A paper jam has occurred at the cutter. (The cutter does not return to the home position.)
• The cutter does not move from the home position.

(3) Label End

Error processing differs depending on the setting of label end/ribbon end process in the system
mode.
When TYP1 is selected (default):
When the transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects a continuous 3-mm long label
end state, an error will result.
When an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer stop state while the
transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor is detecting the label end state, an error will
result.

When TYP2 is selected:

When the transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects a continuous 3-mm long label
end state, the printer completes the printing in progress, and then an error will result when
the next label comes to the home position.
When an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer stop state while the
transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor is detecting the label end state, an error will
result.

(4) Ribbon Error

When the ribbon rotational speed, detected by the ribbon take-up motor sensor and the ribbon
feed motor sensor, deviates from specification, an error will result.
• An error occurred in the sensor which determines the torque for the ribbon motor.
• A ribbon jam occurred.
• The ribbon has been broken/torn.
• A ribbon is not installed.
The printer stops in accordance with the label end/ribbon error handling setting in the system
mode.
When TYP1 is selected (default):
With the ribbon being selected, an error will result when a ribbon rotational speed deviates
from specification.
When TYP2 is selected:
With the ribbon being selected, when a ribbon rotational speed deviates from specification
an error will result under the following conditions: If the unfinished label length is 30 mm or
more, the printer prints the label for 20 mm before the error takes place. If the unfinished
label length is less than 30 mm, the printer completes the unfinished label and stops
printing when the next label comes to the home position.

(5) Head Open Error

If the head open sensor detects continuous 5-mm head open state, an error will result.
If the head open sensor detects the open state when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is
attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
(6) Thermal Head Error
A broken element error has occurred on the thermal head.
An error has occurred on the thermal head driver.

- 213 -
(7) Thermal Head Excessive Temperature
When the ambient temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high temperature
(61 °C or more), an error will result.
When the thermal head temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high
temperature (80°C or more), an error will result.
(8) Front Cover Open Error
If the front cover open sensor detects continuous 5-mm cover open state, an error will result.
If the front cover open sensor detects the cover open state when an issue, a feed, or an
ejection is attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
* At the moment an error occurs, the printer displays an error message, sends a status response,
and then stops. Only the Status Request Command and the Reset Command can be
processed. Other commands are not processed. Restoration by the [RESTART] key is
possible except in case of a thermal head excessive temperature error. (The printer resumes
printing the label at which the error had occurred.)

- 214 -
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES
(1) Write Error
• An error has occurred in writing data in the flash memory.
(2) Format Error
• An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash memory.
(3) Memory Full
• Further data storing is impossible because of insufficient space in the flash memory.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer displays an error message, sends status
response, then stops. The Status Request Command and the Reset Command only can be
processed and other commands are not processed. Restoration by the [RESTART] key is
impossible.

8.4 SYSTEM ERRORS

(1) Momentary Power Interruption Error
• A momentary power interruption has occurred.
(2) Address error
• A command has been fetched from an odd address.
• Word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the word data.
• Long word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the long word data.
(3) General invalid command exception
• An undefined command in a place other than the delay slot has been decoded.
(4) Slot invalid exception
• An undefined command in the delay slot has been decoded.
• A command which rewrites the data in the delay slot has been decoded.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer shows an error message, then stops. (None
of the commands and key operations will be processed.)
(5) EEPROM Error
• The back-up EEPROM cannot be read/written properly.

8.5 RESET PROCESSING

When the [RESTART] key is held down for more than 3 seconds during the error which is restorable
by the [RESTART] key or during a pause, the printer returns to the initial status which is obtained after
the power is turned on.

- 215 -
8.6 RFID ERROR
(1) RFID Write Error
• If writing data onto the RFID tag continuously failed for the maximum number of RFID write
retries, an RFID write error will result. (The maximum number of RFID write retries can be set
in the system mode.)
* At the moment an error occurs, the printer shows an error message, sends a status response,
and then stops. Only the Status Request Command and the Reset Command can be
processed. Other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [RESTART] key is
possible. (The printer resumes printing the label at which the error had occurred.)

- 216 -
9. STATUS RESPONSE
9.1 FUNCTIONS
There are three kinds of status response functions.
(1) Status transmission at the end of a normal issue or the occurrence of an error (automatic status
transmission)
This function is available for the RS-232C interface, socket communication (during connection),
and the e-mail function.
If the option “status response is returned.” has been selected, the printer sends the status to the
host computer when the printer performs a feed or completes an issue normally. (For the
batch/cut mode: after the designated number of labels has been printed. For the strip mode:
after one label has been printed.) In the online mode, the head-up or head-down status is sent
to the host computer.
When an error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.
The remaining count included in the status response indicates the remaining print count of the
batch currently in progress only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is
transmitted.
(2) Status transmission in response to a status request (Status Request Command)
This function is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and socket
communications.
Upon receipt of the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest status indicating its
current state to the host computer, regardless of the status response parameter setting. The
remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch currently in progress only. No
remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. This command is not stored in
the receive buffer, but executed immediately after received.
(3) Receive buffer free space status transmission in response to a status request
(Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command)
This function is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and socket
communications.
Upon receipt of the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command, the printer sends the
latest status indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the status response
parameter setting . The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch
currently in progress only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.
This command is not stored in the receive buffer, but executed immediately after received.
• Strip wait status
The strip wait status (05H) returned to the Status Request Command depends on the system
mode setting.
When the strip wait status is set to “1 (OFF)” in the system mode:
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is on the strip shaft (for example, while
idling, after feeding a label, or after printing all specified number of labels), the printer returns
(00H) to the host.
When the strip wait status is set to “2 (ON)” in the system mode:
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is on the strip shaft (for example, while
idling, after feeding a label, or after printing all specified number of labels), the printer returns
(05H) to the host.
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the strip wait
status (05H) is returned regardless of the setting in the system mode.

- 217 -
9.1.1 STATUS FORMAT

SOH STX Status Remaining count ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Remaining count
• 0000 to 9999
(Fixed as 0000 in the save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (In response to the Status Request Command)
• “2” (32H) (Automatic status transmission)
Detail status

Status to be returned in response to the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command

SOH 01H
Header of the status block
STX 02H
3XH Printer status
Status
3XH * Details are described later.
Status type 33H Status for the ECP mode
3XH
3XH Remaining print count
Remaining count
3XH * Details are described later.
3XH
3XH
Length Total number of bytes of this status block.
3XH
3XH
Free space of the receive buffer
3XH
Free space of “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
3XH
receive buffer However, the maximum value should be equal to the receive
3XH
buffer capacity.
3XH
3XH
3XH Receive buffer capacity
Receive buffer
3XH “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
capacity
3XH However, the maximum value differs depending on the models.
3XH
CR 0DH
Footer of the status block.
LF 0AH

- 218 -
9.1.2 DETAIL STATUS

LCD Message of the Detail Status

Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

ON LINE The print head is closed in the head open state. 00 00

HEAD OPEN The print head is opened in the online mode. 01 01
ON LINE Operating (Analyzing command, drawing, printing, – 02
feeding)
PAUSE **** In a pause state – 04
ON LINE A label is waiting to be stripped. – 05
Display of error command A command error has been found in analyzing the 06 06
(See NOTE 1.) command.
COMMS ERROR A parity error or framing error has occurred during 07 07
communication by RS-232C
PAPER JAM **** A paper jam has occurred during a paper feed. 11 11
CUTTER ERROR**** An abnormal condition has occurred at the cutter. 12 12
NO PAPER **** The paper has run out. 13 13
NO RIBBON **** The ribbon has run out. 14 14
HEAD OPEN **** An attempt was made to feed or issue with the print 15 15
head opened (except the [FEED] key).
HEAD ERROR **** A broken element has been found on the print 17 17
head.
EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head temperature has become 18 18
excessively high.
RIBBON ERROR**** An abnormal condition has occurred in the sensor 21 21
which determines the torque of the ribbon motor.
COVER OPEN **** An attempt was made to feed or issue with the front 24 24
cover opened.
ON LINE Ribbon near end state (Online) – 27
PAUSE Ribbon near end state (In a pause state) – 28
ON LINE Ribbon near end state (Operating) – 29
ON LINE A label issue has been completed normally. 40 –
ON LINE A feed has been completed normally. 41 –
ON LINE A head broken dots check has been completed 00 –
normally.
SAVING ### &&&& In writable character or PC command save mode – 55

FLASH WRITE ERR. An error has occurred in writing data into the flash 50 50
memory.
FORMAT ERROR An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash 51 51
memory.
FLASH CARD FULL Saving failed because of insufficient space in the 54 54
flash memory.

- 219 -
 LCD Message of Detail Status
Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

INITIALIZING... The flash memory is being initialized. (Initialization

is carried out for approximately 15 seconds.)
POWER FAILURE A momentary power interruption has occurred. – –
EEPROM ERROR A back-up EEPROM cannot be read/written – –
properly.
SYSTEM ERROR (a) A command has been fetched from an odd – –
address.
(b) Word data has been accessed from a place
other than the boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the long word
data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other than
the delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot has
been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
- Void pattern has been printed. 60 ---
When data cannot be written onto the RFID tag
properly, the printer prints the void pattern to
indicate that this tag is faulty, and then,
automatically retries data write according to the
setting for the maximum number of RFID write
retries. When the void pattern printing is completed,
the printer sends this status.
RFID WRITE ERROR When writing data onto the RFID tag continuously 61 61
failed for the maximum number of RFID write
retries, the printer enters an error state and sends
this status.
RFID ERROR When the printer cannot communicate with the 62 62
RFID module, due to a failure of the RFID module
or some other reasons, this error occurs.

- 220 -
9.1.3 SUMMARY OF STATUS RESPONSE

Interface Status transmission timing Status size

Automatic status transmission 13 bytes
RS-232C Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] 13 bytes
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] 23 bytes
Automatic status transmission N/A
Nibble mode negotiation immediately after [ESC] WS 13 bytes
Centronics [LF] [NUL] is received
Nibble mode negotiation immediately after [ESC] WB 23 bytes
[LF] [NUL] is received
Automatic status transmission N/A
USB Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] 13 bytes
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] 23 bytes
Automatic status transmission 13 bytes
Socket communications Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] 13 bytes
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] 23 bytes
E-mail function Automatic status transmission 13 bytes

- 221 -
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE SIGNALS
9.2.1 COMPATIBILITY MODE

LCD Messages Output Signal

Printer Status
of Upper Line (English) Busy Select nFault PError
ON LINE In the online mode L H H L
ON LINE In the online mode (communicating) L, H H H L
HEAD OPEN The print head is opened in the online mode. H L L L
PAUSE **** In a pause state H L L L
ON LINE Data has been set from the host while the H H H L
receive buffer is full.
ON LINE After data was set from the host with the L H H L
receive buffer full, some data was processed
and the buffer has free space.
ON LINE Initialize process is in progress. (After the H H H L
power is turned on or the nInit signal is
received.)
Display of error command A command error has occurred in analyzing H L L L
the command.
PAPER JAM **** A paper jam has occurred during a paper H L L L
feed.
CUTTER ERROR**** An abnormal condition has occurred at the H L L L
cutter.
NO PAPER **** The paper has run out. H L L H
NO RIBBON **** The ribbon has run out. H L L H
HEAD OPEN **** A feed or an issue was attempted with the H L L L
print head opened (except the [FEED] key).
HEAD ERROR **** A broken element has been found on the print H L L L
head.
EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head temperature has become H L L L
excessively high.
RIBBON ERROR**** An abnormal condition has occurred on the H L L L
sensor which determines the torque of the
ribbon motor.
COVER OPEN **** A feed or an issue was attempted with the H L L L
front cover opened.
ON LINE Ribbon near end state (Online) L H H L
PAUSE Ribbon near end state (In a pause state) H L L L
ON LINE Ribbon near end state (Operating) L H H L
SAVING ### &&&& In writable character or PC command save L H H L
mode
FLASH WRITE ERR. An error has occurred in writing data into the H L L L
flash memory.
FORMAT ERROR An erase error has occurred in formatting the H L L L
flash memory.
FLASH CARD FULL Saving failed because of insufficient space in H L L L
the flash memory.
INITIALIZING... The flash memory is being initialized.
(Initialization is carried out for approximately
15 seconds.)

- 222 -
 LCD Messages Output Signal
Printer Status
of Upper Line (English) Busy Select nFault PError
POWER FAILURE A momentary power interruption has occurred. H L L L
EEPROM ERROR A back-up EEPROM cannot be read/written H L L L
properly.
SYSTEM ERROR (a) A command has been fetched from an H L L L
odd address.
(b) Word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the word
data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from
a place other than the boundary of the
long word data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other
than the delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
RFID WRITE ERROR When writing data onto the RFID tag H L L L
continuously failed for the maximum number
of RFID write retries, the printer enters an
error state and sends this status.
RFID ERROR When the printer cannot communicate with the H L L L
RFID module, due to a failure of the RFID
module or some other reasons, this error
occurs.

9.3 E-MAIL
The printer is able to notify the PC of the printer status by e-mail. The statuses to be notified by e-
mail are the same as those notified through the serial interface. For details, refer to the Network
Specification (TAA-1401).

- 223 -
10. LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS
The model and the firmware version are displayed on the lower line of the LCD.
LED Indication Restoration Acceptance
LCD Messages of by the of Status
Upper line [RESTART] Request and
No. Printer Status key Reset
POWER ON LINE ERROR
(English) Yes/No Commands
Yes/No

1 ON LINE { { z In the online mode - Yes

ON LINE {  z In the online mode - Yes
(Communicating)
2 HEAD OPEN { z z The print head is opened in the - Yes
online mode.
3 PAUSE **** { z z In a pause state Yes Yes
4 COMMS ERROR { z { A parity error or framing error has Yes Yes
occurred during communication
by RS-232C.
5 PAPER JAM **** { z { A paper jam has occurred during Yes Yes
paper feed.
6 CUTTER ERROR**** { z { An abnormal condition has Yes Yes
occurred at the cutter.
7 NO PAPER **** { z { The paper has run out. Yes Yes
8 NO RIBBON **** { z { The ribbon has run out. Yes Yes
9 HEAD OPEN **** { z { A feed or an issue was attempted Yes Yes
with the print head opened
(except the [FEED] key).
10 HEAD ERROR { z { A broken element has been Yes Yes
found on the thermal head.
11 EXCESS HEAD TEMP { z { The print head temperature has No Yes
become excessively high.
12 RIBBON ERROR**** { z { An abnormal condition has Yes Yes
occurred on the sensor which
determines the torque of the
ribbon motor.
13 COVER OPEN **** { z { A feed or an issue was attempted Yes Yes
with the front cover opened.
14 SAVING ### &&&& { { z In writable character or PC - Yes
command save mode
15 FLASH WRITE ERR. { z { An error has occurred in writing No Yes
data into the flash ROM on the
CPU board.
16 FORMAT ERROR { z { An erase error has occurred in No Yes
formatting the flash ROM on the
CPU board.
17 FLASH CARD FULL { z { Saving failed because of the No Yes
insufficient space in the flash
ROM on the CPU board.
18 Display of error { z { A command error has occurred in Yes Yes
command analyzing the command.
(See NOTE 1.)

- 224 -
 Restoration Acceptance
LCD Messages of
No. LED Indication Printer Status by the of Status
Upper line [RESTART] Request
key Reset
(English) Yes/No Command
POWER ON LINE ERROR
Yes/No

19 POWER FAILURE { z { A momentary power interruption No No

has occurred.
20 INITIALIZING... { z z The memory is being initialized. – –
(Initialization is carried out for a
max. of approximately 15
seconds)
21 EEPROM ERROR { z { A back-up EEPROM cannot be No No
read/written properly.
22 SYSTEM ERROR { z { When any abnormal operations No No
as below are performed, a
system error occurs.
(a) Command fetch from an odd
address
(b) Access to the word data
from a place other than the
boundary of the word data
(c) Access to the long word
data from a place other than
the boundary of the long
word data
(d) Access to the area of
80000000H to FFFFFFFFH
in the logic space in the user
mode.
(e) Undefined command placed
in other than the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) Undefined command in the
delay slot has been
decoded.
(g) Command to rewrite the
delay slot has been
decoded.
23 100BASE LAN { z z The 100BASE LAN is being – –
INITIALIZING... initialized.
24 DHCP CLIENT { z z The DHCP client is being – –
INITIALIZING... initialized.
* When the DHCP function is
enabled.
25 RFID WRITE ERROR { z { Writing data onto the RFID tag Yes Yes
continuously failed for the
maximum number of RFID write
retries.
26 RFID ERROR { z { The printer cannot communicate Yes Yes
with the RFID module.

- 225 -
NOTE 1: When a command error has been found in the sent command, 16-byte command code of the
erroneous command is displayed on the upper line of the LCD. (However, [LF] and [NUL]
are not displayed.)
[Example 1] [ESC] PC001; 0A00, 0300, 2, 2, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
Command error
LCD display
PC001;0A00,0300,
B-SA4T V1.0A

[Example 2] [ESC] T20 G30 [LF] [NUL]

Command error
LCD display
T20G30
B-SA4T V1.0A

[Example 3] [ESC] XR; 0200, 0300, 0450, 1200, 1 [LF] [NUL]

Command error
LCD display
XR;0200,0300,045
B-SA4T V1.0A

NOTE 2: When the command error is displayed, “? (3FH)” is displayed for codes other than 20H to 7FH
and A0H to DFH.
NOTE 3: {: ON
: Blinking
z: OFF
****: Remaining number of labels to be printed to 9999 (in units of 1 label/tag)
###: Remaining memory capacity of PC save area in the flash memory:
0 to 3,072 (in K bytes)
&&&&: Remaining memory capacity of writable character storage area in the flash memory
0 to 3,072 (in K bytes)

- 226 -
11. LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES (UPPER LINE OF LCD)

No. ENGLISH No. GERMAN No. FRENCH

1 ON LINE 1 ON LINE 1 PRETE
2 HEAD OPEN 2 KOPF OFFEN 2 TETE OUVERTE
3 PAUSE **** 3 PAUSE **** 3 PAUSE ****
4 COMMS ERROR 4 UEBERTR.-FEHLER 4 ERR. COMMUNICAT.
5 PAPER JAM **** 5 PAPIERSTAU **** 5 PB. PAPIER ****
6 CUTTER ERROR**** 6 MESSERFEHL. **** 6 PB. CUTTER ****
7 NO PAPER **** 7 PAPIERENDE **** 7 FIN PAPIER ****
8 NO RIBBON **** 8 FARBB.-ENDE **** 8 FIN RUBAN ****
9 HEAD OPEN **** 9 KOPF OFFEN **** 9 TETE OUVERTE****
10 HEAD ERROR 10 KOPF DEFEKT 10 ERREUR TETE
11 EXCESS HEAD TEMP 11 KOPF UEBERHITZT 11 TETE TROP CHAUDE
12 RIBBON ERROR**** 12 FB-FEHLER **** 12 ERREUR RUBAN****
13 COVER OPEN **** 13 DECKEL OFFEN**** 13 ERR. CAPOT ****
14 SAVING ### &&&& 14 SP.-MOD ### &&&& 14 MEM LIB ### &&&&
15 FLASH WRITE ERR. 15 FLASH FEHLER 15 ERREUR MEM FLASH
16 FORMAT ERROR 16 FORMATFEHLER 16 ERREUR DE FORMAT
17 FLASH CARD FULL 17 FLASH ZU KLEIN 17 MEM INSUFFISANTE
18 INITIALIZING... 18 INITIALIZING... 18 INITIALIZING...
19 POWER FAILURE 19 POWER FAILURE 19 POWER FAILURE
20 EEPROM ERROR 20 EEPROM ERROR 20 EEPROM ERROR
21 SYSTEM ERROR 21 SYSTEM ERROR 21 SYSTEM ERROR
22 RFID WRITE ERROR 22 RFID WRITE ERROR 22 RFID WRITE ERROR
23 RFID ERROR 23 RFID ERROR 23 RFID ERROR

No. DUTCH No. SPANISH No. JAPANESE

1 IN LIJN 1 ON LINE 1
2 KOP OPEN 2 CABEZAL ABIERTO 2
3 PAUZE **** 3 PAUSA **** 3
4 COMM. FOUT 4 ERROR COMUNICACI 4
5 PAPIER VAST **** 5 ATASCO PAPEL**** 5
6 SNIJMES FOUT**** 6 ERROR CORTAD**** 6
7 PAPIER OP **** 7 SIN PAPEL **** 7
8 LINT OP **** 8 SIN CINTA **** 8
9 KOP OPEN **** 9 CABEZA ABIER**** 9
10 PRINTKOP DEFECT 10 ERROR DE CABEZAL 10
11 TEMP. FOUT 11 TEMP.CABEZA ALTA 11
12 LINT FOUT **** 12 ERROR CINTA **** 12
13 DEUR OPEN **** 13 TAPA ABIERTA**** 13
14 MEM ### &&&& 14 SALVAR ### &&&& 14
15 FLASH MEM FOUT 15 ERROR ESCRITURA 15
16 FORMAAT FOUT 16 ERROR DE FORMATO 16
17 GEHEUGEN VOL 17 MEMORIA INSUFICI 17
18 INITIALIZING... 18 INITIALIZING... 18
19 POWER FAILURE 19 POWER FAILURE 19
20 EEPROM ERROR 20 EEPROM ERROR 20
21 SYSTEM ERROR 21 SYSTEM ERROR 21
22 RFID WRITE ERROR 22 RFID WRITE ERROR 22
23 RFID ERROR 23 RFID ERROR
* Japanese messages are omitted here.

- 227 -
No. Italian
1 PRONTA
2 TESTA APERTA
3 PAUSA ****
4 ERR. COMUNICAZ.
5 CARTA INCEP.****
6 ERR. TAGL. ****
7 NO CARTA ****
8 NO NASTRO ****
9 TESTA APERTA****
10 ERROR TESTA
11 TEMP. TESTA ALTA
12 ERR. NASTRO ****
13 COVER OPEN ****
14 SALVA ### &&&&
15 ERR.SCRITT.CARD
16 ERR. FORMATTAZ.
17 MEM. CARD PIENA
18 INITIALIZING...
19 POWER FAILURE
20 EEPROM ERROR
21 SYSTEM ERROR
22 RFID WRITE ERROR
23 RFID ERROR

- 228 -
12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE
The followings are the character code tables. However, the characters which can be printed are
different according to the character type.

12.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER,

GOTHIC725 BLACK
(Bit map font type: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N, O, P, Q, R, q)

(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô =
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ When Japanese message
is selected in the system
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û •
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹ indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³ The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² be changed in the
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ system mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ ⎧
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ ⎭
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª μ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù º τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Θ • When Japanese message
A : J Z j z è Ü Ω • is selected in the system
*
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √ indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ n
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2 be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ∫ » ∩ system mode.

- 229 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í Ð ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u Á §
6 & 6 F V f v Â Í ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Ú ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ • is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » ¤ system mode.

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ª ß ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù À Ã Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ © Ï × °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì ³
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ ÿ ² be changed in the
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ Ì g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤ ´ system mode.

- 230 -
(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » system mode.

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } § be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » ¤ system mode.

- 231 -
(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ± Á á
2 ” 2 B R b r  â
3 # 3 C S c s Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨ ¸
9 ) 9 I Y i y © É é When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z Ú ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë ë
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ß system mode.

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y © When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 232 -
(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í Ý í ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î Þ î þ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ system mode.

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨
9 ) 9 I Y i y © When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 233 -
(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í í ¹ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ system mode.

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · × ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É é When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ¨ ¯ ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¸ Æ æ ß system mode.

- 234 -
(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t C Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ì Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î Þ î þ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ system mode.

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 235 -
12.2 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)
(1) PC-850, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ ¥ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } ¥ be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

- 236 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

- 237 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X ^ ˜
9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message
A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

(6) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

- 238 -
(7) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T C
5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y When Japanese message

A * : J Z J Z
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ K {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ L |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] M } be changed in the
E . > N ^ N ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ O system mode.

- 239 -
12.3 OCR-A (Bit map font type: S)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N ¥ the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n ¥ the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 240 -
(2) PC-8
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M ¥ is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
F / O indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } ¥ is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n mode, code 5CH
F / ? O o indicates “¥”.

- 241 -
(3) PC-852
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 242 -
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 243 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X ^ ˜
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 244 -
(6) PC-1253
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 245 -
(7) LATIN9
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese
D - M message is selected in
E . > N the system mode, code
F / O 5CH indicates “¥”.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese
D - = M ] m } message is selected in
E . > N ^ n the system mode, code
F / ? O o 5CH indicates “¥”.

- 246 -
12.4 OCR-B (Bit map font type: T)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M is selected in the system
E . > N ¥ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0 -
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ ¥ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 247 -
(2) PC-8
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M ¥ is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } ¥ is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 248 -
(3) PC-852
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0 -
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 249 -
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 250 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254, LATIN9
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8 ˜
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5 ¥
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 ˜
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 251 -
(6) PC-1253
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L When Japanese message
D - M is selected in the system
E . > N mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5 ¥
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | When Japanese message
D - = M ] m } is selected in the system
E . > N ^ n ~ mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 252 -
12.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B)
(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª ã µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ² be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ system mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ ⎧
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ ⎭
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª μ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù º τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Θ •
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Ω •
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ n
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2 be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ∫ » ∩ system mode.

- 253 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í C ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u §
6 & 6 F V f v ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | î
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » ¤ system mode.

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ª ß ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ã µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ÿ 2 be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤ system mode.

- 254 -
(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü C ±
2 " 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
C , < L \ l | î £
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » system mode.

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } § be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » ¤ system mode.

- 255 -
(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C á
2 " 2 B R b r â
3 # 3 C S c s ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ß system mode.

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 256 -
(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y é ù
A * : J Z j z ª ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß ï ÿ system mode.

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z ª
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 257 -
(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ system mode.

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Æ æ ß system mode.

- 258 -
(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ system mode.

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 259 -
12.6 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3 (Outline font type: E, F, G)
(1) All types of character codes

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 $ 4
5 % 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C , ¥
D –
E . ~
F /

- 260 -
12.7 TEC OUTLINE FONT 2, 3, GOTHIC725 BLACK (Outline font type: H, I, J)
(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô =
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á Ì Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² be changed in the
¯
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ system mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ • is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ² be changed in the
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » system mode.

- 261 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C d Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü ´
L í Ð ß ´´
2 ” 2 B R b r é Í ó D
Š Ô
‘
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë ´
N Š
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö A dŠ n´
‘
5 % 5 E U e u å
u Š
L a A´ Š
N Šn §
‘
6 & 6 F V f v c´ ŠI Š
Z Â Š
A Í Š ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç S´ z
Š Š
E a
Š Î š ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x l s´ E S¸ e
Š R ´ °
‘
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö e U ´ ¨ When Japanese message
‘
A * : J Z j z ´´
O Ü ¬ ´r • is selected in the system
´U´ mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ´´
o Š
T z´ ´´
u
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î Št Š
C y´ Š
R
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Z´ L s¸ Z¨ T¸ Y ´ Š
r be changed in the
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä × « z¨ å
U t¸ g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o C´ Š
c » ¤ system mode.

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ª ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û Š
G Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù g
Š À Ã Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê I¨ ¿ © Ï × °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì ³
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ¹ Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ ÿ ² be changed in the
¯
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä S¸ « ¥ Ì g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Å s¸ » ¤ ´ system mode.

- 262 -
(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ¨ When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z è Ü is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ï ½
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | î £
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » system mode.

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } § be changed in the
E . > N ˆ n ~ « g parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o » ¤ system mode.

- 263 -
(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C ´
R Ð ´r ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q Š ± Á ´
N á n´
2 ” 2 B R b r Š N
Š â n
Š
‘
3 # 3 C S c s L l Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u A µ ´
L ´´
O Í o´´
‘
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ ´
C Ö c´ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨ ¸ Š
C Š
R c
Š Šr
9 ) 9 I Y i y a¸ É å
U é uå When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z Š
S s
Š S¸ s¸ E Ú e ú is selected in the system
‘ ‘ mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { ´
S s´ « » Ë ´´
U ë ´´
u
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | Š
T Št ¬ Š
L Š
E Ü e
Š ü
´´ The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - Í Ý í ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Š
Z z
Š ® ŠI Î T¸ î t¸ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o Z¨ Z´ z´ z¨ Š
D ß system mode.

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ’ 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 264 -
(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ² Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ˆ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y ¹ É Ù é ù When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z Š
S Š
s ª º Ê Ú ê ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - ½ Í Ý í ý be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Š
Z Š
z ® Î î parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ system mode.

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 ” 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ’ 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 265 -
(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ² Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ˆ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y ¹ É Ù é ù When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z S
Š s
Š ª º Ê Ú ê ú is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - ½ Í í ¹ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î S¸ î s¸ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o - ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ system mode.

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C A Š
S a s
Š
‘ ‘
1 ! 1 A Q a q ± ´
N n´
2 ” 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ ´
C Ó c´ ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ E Ö e ö
‘ ‘
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · × ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø Š
C Š
c
9 ) 9 I Y i y ¹ É L é l When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z Z´ ´
S z´ ´s is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « »
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ¨ ¯ - ½ Z¨ z¨ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Š ® Š
Z Š
z parameter setting in the
‘
F / ? O _ o ¸ Æ æ ß system mode.

- 266 -
(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C Ð à ñ
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ò
2 ” 2 B R b r ² Ò â ó
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ó ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ð Š
Z Ä Ô ä õ
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å ö
6 & 6 F V f v Š
S ¾ Æ Ö æ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w § Ç × ç ø
8 ( 8 H X h x s
Š z
Š È Ø è ù
9 ) 9 I Y i y ¹ É Ù é ú When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê û is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë ü
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ì Ü ì ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } - Í Ý í be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î î ÿ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï system mode.

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y When Japanese message
A * : J Z j z is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
B + ; K [ k {
indicates “¥”.
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter setting in the
F / ? O _ o system mode.

- 267 -
12.8 TrueType FONT
(1) PC-850

(2) PC-8

- 268 -
(3) PC-852

(4) PC-857

- 269 -
(5) PC-851

(6) PC-855

- 270 -
(7) PC-1250

(8) PC-1251

- 271 -
(9) PC-1252

(10) PC-1253

- 272 -
(11) PC-1254

(12) PC-1257

- 273 -
(13) LATIN9

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p ° À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t Š Ä Ô ä ô
C Z
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Š
S ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x s Š
Š z È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Œ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } - œ Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Ÿ Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ

(14) Arabic

- 274 -
13. BAR CODE TABLE
(1) WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC) (2) CODE39 (Standard)
ITF, MSI, UCC/EAN128, Industrial 2 of 5
RSS-14/RSS-14 Stacked
RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
RSS-Limited

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 SP 0 P
1 1 1 1 A Q
2 2 2 2 B R
3 3 3 3 C S
4 4 4 $ 4 D T
5 5 5 % 5 E U
6 6 6 6 F V
7 7 7 7 G W
8 8 8 8 H X
9 9 9 9 I Y
A A * J Z
B B + K
C C L
D D – M
E E • N
F F / O

(3) CODE39 (Full ASCII)

[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 " 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B /K %F K %K +K %P
C , < L \ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o F /O %J O %O +O %T

- 275 -
(4) NW-7

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0
1 1 A a
2 2 B b
3 3 C c
4 $ 4 D d t
5 5 e
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A * :
B +
C
D –
E • n
F /

(5) CODE93
[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 " 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B + %F K %K +K %P
C , < L \ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o F / %J O %O +O %T

- 276 -
(6) CODE128
[Transfer code]

– – 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v [Drawing code]
7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x Value Code Table
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to transmit control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to transmit special codes:
Value
30 (Character >) → >0
95 → >1
96 → >2
97 → >3
98 → >4
99 → >5
100 → >6
101 → >7
102 → >8
e Designation of start code:
START (CODE A) → >7
START (CODE B) → >6
START (CODE C) → >5

- 277 -
Value Code Table

VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE
A B C A B C A B C
0 SP SP 00 36 D D 36 72 BS h 72
1 ! ! 01 37 E E 37 73 HT i 73
2 " " 02 38 F F 38 74 LF j 74
3 # # 03 39 G G 39 75 VT k 75
4 $ $ 04 40 H H 40 76 FF l 76
5 % % 05 41 I I 41 77 CR m 77
6 & & 06 42 J J 42 78 SO n 78
7 ' ' 07 43 K K 43 79 SI o 79
8 ( ( 08 44 L L 44 80 DLE p 80
9 ) ) 09 45 M M 45 81 DC1 q 81
10 * * 10 46 N N 46 82 DC2 r 82
11 + + 11 47 O O 47 83 DC3 s 83
12 , , 12 48 P P 48 84 DC4 t 84
13 – – 13 49 Q Q 49 85 NAK u 85
14 . . 14 50 R R 50 86 SYN v 86
15 / / 15 51 S S 51 87 ETB w 87
16 0 0 16 52 T T 52 88 CAN x 88
17 1 1 17 53 U U 53 89 EM y 89
18 2 2 18 54 V V 54 90 SUB z 90
19 3 3 19 55 W W 55 91 ESC { 91
20 4 4 20 56 X X 56 92 FS ¦ 92
21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57 93 GS } 93
22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58 94 RS ~ 94
23 7 7 23 59 [ [ 59 95 US DEL 95
24 8 8 24 60 \ \ 60 96 FNC3 FNC3 96
25 9 9 25 61 ] ] 61 97 FNC2 FNC2 97
26 : : 26 62 ^ ^ 62 98 SHIFT SHIFT 98
27 ; ; 27 63 _ _ 63 99 CODE C CODE C 99
28 < < 28 64 NUL ` 64 100 CODE B FNC4 CODE B
29 = = 29 65 SOH a 65 101 FNC4 CODE A CODE A
30 > > 30 66 STX b 66 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
31 ? ? 31 67 ETX c 67
32 @ @ 32 68 EOT d 68 103 START CODE A
33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69 104 START CODE B
34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70 105 START CODE C
35 C C 35 71 BEL g 71

- 278 -
(7) Data Matrix
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.

Format ID Code Details

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space
2 Letters A to Z space
3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space
5 ASCII (7-bit) 00H to 7FH
6 ISO (8-bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji)

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 279 -
(8) PDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.

Mode Code Details

EXC mode Alphanumerics, symbol 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ”
# $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - .
/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^
_ ` { | } ~ CR HT
Binary/ASCII Plus Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
mode Character Set
Numeric Numerics 0 to 9
Compaction mode

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 280 -
(9) MicroPDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.

Mode Details
Upper case letters, A to Z, space
space
Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
Character Set
Numerics 0 to 9

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 281 -
(10) QR code
When manual mode is selected in the Format Command
y Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

y Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

y Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However,
since the data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used should be
designated by selecting the mode.

Mode Code Details

N Numerals 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:

Data to be printed

[Transfer code for QR code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

- 282 -
 c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

Examples of data designation for QR code

c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode : 123456
Kanji mode : Kanji data
Binary mode : a i u e o
Alphanumeric and symbol mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o ,AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of data Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed strings printed

Designation of mode

f Automatic mode
When the same data as e above is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

- 283 -
(11) Postal code
Customer bar code POSTNET

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P 0 0
1 1 A Q 1 1
2 2 B R 2 2
3 3 C S 3 3
4 4 D T 4 4
5 5 E U 5 5
6 6 F V 6 6
7 7 G W 7 7
8 8 H X 8 8
9 9 I Y 9 9
A J Z A
B K B
C L C
D – M D
E N E
F O F

RM4SCC KIX CODE

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P 0 0 P p
1 1 A Q 1 1 A Q a q
2 2 B R 2 2 B R b r
3 3 C S 3 3 C S c s
4 4 D T 4 4 D T d t
5 5 E U 5 5 E U e u
6 6 F V 6 6 F V f v
7 7 G W 7 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X 8 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y 9 9 I Y i y
A J Z A J Z j z
B K B K k
C L C L l
D M D M m
E N E N n
F O F O o

* “(” or “)” can be designated only as a start/stop code.

These should not be entered in data.
If these are entered between data, no bar code is drawn.

- 284 -
(12) MaxiCode
Symbol Character Code Set A Code Set B Code Set C Code Set D Code Set E
Value
Decimal Binary Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal
0 000000 CR 13 ‘ 96 À 192 à 224 NUL 0
1 000001 A 65 a 97 Á 193 á 225 SOH 1
2 000010 B 66 b 98 Â 194 â 226 STX 2
3 000011 C 67 c 99 Ã 195 ã 227 ETX 3
4 000100 D 68 d 100 Ä 196 ä 228 EOT 4
5 000101 E 69 e 101 Å 197 å 229 ENQ 5
6 000110 F 70 f 102 Æ 198 æ 230 ACK 6
7 000111 G 71 g 103 Ç 199 ç 231 BEL 7
8 001000 H 72 h 104 È 200 è 232 BS 8
9 001001 I 73 i 105 É 201 é 233 HT 9
10 001010 J 74 j 106 Ê 202 ê 234 LF 10
11 001011 K 75 k 107 Ë 203 ë 235 VT 11
12 001100 L 76 l 108 Ì 204 ì 236 FF 12
13 001101 M 77 m 109 Í 205 í 237 CR 13
14 001110 N 78 n 110 Î 206 î 238 SO 14
15 001111 O 79 o 111 Ï 207 ï 239 SI 15
16 010000 P 80 p 112 Ð 208 ð 240 DLE 16
17 010001 Q 81 q 113 Ñ 209 ñ 241 DC1 17
18 010010 R 82 r 114 Ò 210 ò 242 DC2 18
19 010011 S 83 s 115 Ó 211 ó 243 DC3 19
20 010100 T 84 t 116 Ô 212 ô 244 DC4 20
21 010101 U 85 u 117 Õ 213 õ 245 NAK 21
22 010110 V 86 v 118 Ö 214 ö 246 SYN 22
23 010111 W 87 w 119 × 215 ÷ 247 ETB 23
24 011000 X 88 x 120 Ø 216 ø 248 CAN 24
25 011001 Y 89 y 121 Ù 217 ù 249 EM 25
26 011010 Z 90 z 122 Ú 218 ú 250 SUB 26
27 011011 [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC]
28 011100 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 [Pad]
29 011101 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 [Pad]
30 011110 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 ESC 27
31 011111 [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS]
32 100000 Space 32 ( 123 Û 219 û 251 FS 28
33 100001 [Pad] [Pad] Ü 220 ü 252 GS 29
34 100010 “ 34 ) 125 Ý 221 ý 253 RS 30
35 100011 # 35 ~ 126 Þ 222 þ 254 US 31
36 100100 $ 36 DEL 127 ß 223 ÿ 255 {C159} 159
37 100101 % 37 ; 59 ª 170 ¡ 161 NBSP 160
38 100110 & 38 < 60 ¬ 172 ¨ 168 ¢ 162
39 100111 ‘ 39 = 61 ± 177 « 171 £ 163
40 101000 ( 40 > 62 ² 178 ¯ 175 ¤ 164
41 101001 ) 41 ? 63 ³ 179 ° 176 ¥ 165
42 101010 ” 42 [ 91 181 ' 180 166
43 101011 + 43 \ 92 ¹ 185 • 183 § 167
44 101100 , 44 ] 93 º 186 184 © 169
45 101101 - 45 ^ 94 ¼ 188 » 187 SHY 173
46 101110 . 46 _ 95 ½ 189 ¿ 191 ® 174
47 101111 / 47 Space 32 ¾ 190 {C138} 138 ¶ 182
48 110000 0 48 , 44 {C128} 128 {C139} 139 {C149} 149
49 110001 1 49 . 46 {C129} 129 {C140} 140 {C150} 150
50 110010 2 50 / 47 {C130} 130 {C141} 141 {C151} 151
51 110011 3 51 : 58 {C131} 131 {C142} 142 {C152} 152
52 110100 4 52 @ 64 {C132} 132 {C143} 143 {C153} 153
53 110101 5 53 ! 33 {C133} 133 {C144} 144 {C154} 154
54 110110 6 54 | 124 {C134} 134 {C145} 145 {C155} 155
55 110111 7 55 [Pad] {C135} 135 {C146} 146 {C156} 156
56 111000 8 56 [2 Shift A] {C136} 136 {C147} 147 {C157} 157
57 111001 9 57 [3 Shift A] {C137} 137 {C148} 148 {C158} 158
58 111010 : 58 [Pad] [Latch A] [Latch A] [Latch A]
59 111011 [Shift B] [Shift A] Space 32 Space 32 Space 32
60 111100 [Shift C] [Shift C] [Lock In C] [Shift C] [Shift C]
61 111101 [Shift D] [Shift D] [Shift D] [Lock In D] [Shift D]
62 111110 [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Lock In E]
63 111111 [Latch B] [Latch A] [Latch B] [Latch B] [Latch B]

- 285 -
 c How to send control code data:
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)

e How to send a Kanji code:

Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used, however, it can be designated.
If it is designated, data following “NUL” code is not printed.

When the MaxiCode specification setting is set to “TYPE2: Special specification” in the system mode:
[Transfer code for MaxiCode]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
(
Note1)

B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL (Note2)

The all codes (00H to FFH) can be used. In the following cases, however, the codes will
become special codes. For the transfer method, refer to the following.
(Note 1) In case of LF (0AH) data:
LF (0AH) → J (FFH, 4AH)
(Note 2) In case of (FFH) data:
(FFH) → (FFH, FFH)
ESC (1BH) and NUL (00H) can be used as they are.

- 286 -
(13) CP code

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 287 -
(14) RSS Expanded

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 SP 0 P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 FNC1 3 C S c s
4 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K k
C , < L l
D – = M m
E . > N n
F / ? O _ o

- 288 -
14. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA
: Field to be incremented/decremented
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)
: Field subject to printing numerals under bars.

Type of Bar Code: JAN8, EAN8

(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

7 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

- 289 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13, EAN13
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

12 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

- 290 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

- 291 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the bar code.
Data
6 digits

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D
Data

Other than 6 digits Not to be drawn

- 292 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

- 293 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 + 5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

- 294 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

14 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

- 295 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 + 5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

17 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

- 296 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Data

13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

- 297 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Data

16 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

- 298 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in

Data the bar code.

8 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

- 299 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input Calculate and reflect modulus

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data 10 C/D in the bar code.

11 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

- 300 -
Type of Bar Code: MSI
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 15 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

16 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) IBM modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 15 digits To be checked as IBM modulus 10
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
16 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 14 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.

15 digits or more Not to be drawn

(4) IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 10.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

(5) IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 11.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 301 -
Type of Bar Code: Interleaved 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of DBP modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a DBP modulus 10 C/D.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 302 -
Type of Bar Code: Industrial 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus check character check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as a modulus check character
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus check character

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus check character.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 303 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Standard)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
124 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 43 check

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
124 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 122 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

123 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 304 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 43 check

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
61 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

Type of Bar Code: NW7

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix
No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Max. 125 digits Start code Stop code

Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 305 -
Type of Bar Code: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)
(1) No affix
PSEUDO103 check
Auto affix of PSEUDO103
No. of Input Digits

Input
Min. 3 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data
Max. 125 digits
(including start
code) Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Data
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.
2 digits or less
Not to be drawn
126 digits or more

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

Type of Bar Code: Auto selection of CODE128

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Max. 60 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Data Stop code
Start code Selection code Affix
PSEUDO103
C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

- 306 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE93
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
Drawing
Data Stop code
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.
Start code Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

Type of Bar Code: UCC/EAN128

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits St FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 Sp

Drawing
Data
Start code Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.
Stop code
Other than 19 digits Not to be drawn

- 307 -
Type of Bar Code: POSTNET
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
Data

5 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp Fr D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Fr

Drawing Start code Frame
Data Frame
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Other than 5, 9, and
Not to be drawn
11 digits

Type of Bar Code: RM4SCC

(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input (St) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 (Sp)

Data
Start code Stop code
12 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit
13 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Bar Code: KIX CODE

(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

19 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 308 -
Type of Bar Code: Customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Data

20 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data Start code Dedicated check digit
Stop code
21 digits or more Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.

Type of Bar Code: Highest priority customer bar code

(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D Sp

Drawing Start code CC7

Data
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
20 digits or more Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.

Type of Bar Code: RSS-14, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional, RSS Limited
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 C/D

Data
Dedicated check digit
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Bar Code: RSS Expanded

(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
70 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 C/D

Data
Dedicated check digit
71 digits or more Not to be drawn
NOTE: Some data cannot be drawn even if the number of input digits is less than 70.

- 309 -
15. AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES
Designation of
Type of Bar Code Start/Stop Codes
Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Omit Full ASCII *12345ABC*
(No designation) 12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard **12345ABC*
CODE 39 Add start code Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC
Full ASCII *12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard ***12345ABC
Full ASCII */J/J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard **12345ABC**
Full ASCII */J12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard **12345*ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC**
Full ASCII 12345ABC/J*
Add stop code *12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC*
Full ASCII 12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC***
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC**
Full ASCII *12345/JABC/J*

- 310 -
 Designation of
Type of Bar Code Start/Stop Codes Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC
Full ASCII 12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
CODE 39 Start/stop code Full ASCII *12345ABC*
not added 12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC
Full ASCII 12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*

Designation of
Type of Bar Code Start/Stop Codes Input Data Drawing Data
12345678 a12345678a
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Omit b12345678d b12345678d
(No designation) 12345a678 a12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c
12345678 a12345678
a12345678 aa12345678
12345678c a12345678c
Add start code b12345678d ab12345678d
12345a678 a12345a678
ab12345678 aab12345678
a12345678bc aa12345678bc
d12345b678c ad12345b678c
NW7 12345678 12345678a
a12345678 a12345678a
12345678c 12345678ca
b12345678d b12345678da
Add stop code 12345a678 12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678a
a12345678bc a12345678bca
d12345b678c d12345b678ca
12345678 12345678
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Start/stop code b12345678d b12345678d
not added 12345a678 12345a678
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c

- 311 -